Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.

Internal use only

171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 1
vpfaff7,

Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. and pass them on to the new owner if you sell
Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with the vehicle.
your vehicle and read the Owner's Manual. The technical documentation team at Daim-
This will help you to obtain the maximum ler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motor-
pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid ing.
endangering yourself and others. i You can get to know the important fea-
Items of optional equipment are marked with tures of your vehicle in German and in
an asterisk *. English in the interactive Owner's Manual
The equipment in your vehicle may vary, on the Internet at:
depending on the model, the ordered items, www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanlei-
the country specifications and availability. tung
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show
a left-hand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of
the switches, levers, stowage compartments,
etc. will differ accordingly in a right-hand-
drive vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art and therefore
reserves the right to introduce changes in
design, equipment and technical features at
any time. You cannot, therefore, base any
claims on the data, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this Owner's Manual.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre if you have any questions.
The Owner’s Manual, Brief Instructions,
service booklet and supplements related to
vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle.
You should always keep them in the vehicle
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 2
vpfaff7,

Contents

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

2
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 3
vpfaff7,

Index

1, 2, 3 ... Air-recirculation mode with con- AUTO lights

venience opening/closing feature . 131 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7G–TRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . 127 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 126 Automatic transmission
A Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . 130 Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . . 86
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 50 Heatmatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . . 85
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 191 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Misted up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Acceleration Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 203
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . 129 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Accident Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Program selector button . . . . . . . . . 87
Active Service System Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 127 Releasing the parking lock man-
see ASSYST PLUS Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Airbag see Climate control Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . 85
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Air-conditioning Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 126 Axle load, maximum permissible
Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 AIRSCARF neck-level heating . . . . . . . 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 254
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Antifreeze concentration . . . . . . . . . 260
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Anti-lock braking system B
Head/thorax airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 see ABS
BAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Anti-theft alarm system
Battery
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 see ATA
Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Air conditioning Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2-zone Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ASSYST PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Activating/deactivating air-recir- ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 52
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
culation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 53
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Activating/deactivating auxiliary Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 230
heating/ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

3
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 4
vpfaff7,

Index

Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Brake system Central locking

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Automatic locking (on-board com-
Voltage (on-board computer) . . . . . . 97 Bulb puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Belt force limiters Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 215 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Central locking/unlocking button . . . 57
Belt tensioners Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 216 Central unlocking
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Parking lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Centre console
Bonnet Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 216 Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Reversing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Changing a wheel
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 see Flat tyre
Bonnet release lever see Lamp Children
Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Bulbs In the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Boot Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Child seat
Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 C Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Automatic recognition (malfunc-
Calling up a malfunction
Boot lid tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
see Message memory menu
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Boot separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Brake Cockpit
High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 167
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Brake Assist Collapsible emergency spare wheel
Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
see BAS Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Collapsible wheel
Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Pumping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
CD player/CD changer
Brake lamps Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Operating (on-board computer) . . . . 99
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

4
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 5
vpfaff7,

Index

COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Dipped-beam headlamps Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Automatic headlamp mode* . . . . . . 74 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Constant headlamp mode Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Driving tip
Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 104 Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Consumption statistics (on-board Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . 164
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Display message . . . . . . 180, 181, 182 Up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 DVD audio
Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Door Operation (on-board computer) . . . . 99
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 DVD video
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Operation (on-board computer) . . . . 99
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 210 E
Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 57
Easy-entry/exit feature
D Door control panel
Activating/deactivating (on-
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Dashboard board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Draught stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
see Cockpit Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Drinks holder
Date Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
see Cup holder
Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 103 Electrical/electronic equipment
Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Daytime driving lights Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
see Constant headlamp mode Electronic Stability Program
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Delayed switch-off see ESP®
Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Exterior lighting (on-board com- e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Emergency engine starting . . . . . . . 236
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Interior lighting (on-board com- Emergency key element
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Emergency locking
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

5
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 6
vpfaff7,

Index

Emergency running mode Exterior lighting Frequencies

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 203 Delayed switch-off (on-board Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Emergency unlocking computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Exterior mirror parking position Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69 Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Engine Exterior mirrors Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 67 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . . 66 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257
Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 66 Fuel filler flap
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Folding in when locking (on-board Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . 195 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Fuel line
Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69 Fuel tank
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . 153 Exterior view Fuse box
Checking the oil level (on-board Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 F Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Display message Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 186, 187
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 G
Flat tyre
Temperature display (on-board
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Garage door
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Opening/closing (with the remote
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 51
Foglamps Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 51
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Display message . . . . . . . . . . 176, 177
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 194

6
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 7
vpfaff7,

Index

Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 HomeLink® Intermittent wipe

Programming the remote control . . 144 see Garage door opener Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Gear indicator (on-board computer) . 96
Gearshift program I J
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Jack
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . 240
Indicator and warning lamp Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Golf bag
Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 194 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Gross vehicle weight, maximum
permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 46, 191
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 K
H Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 194 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Handbrake Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . 193 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Indicator lamp Closing the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Head/thorax airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 see Indicator and warning lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . 184, 187
Headlamp Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Headlamp mode (automatic) . . . . . . . 74 Selecting the language (on-board Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Headlamps computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 56
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Opening the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Key positions
Headlamps delayed switch-off Automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off Delayed switch-off (on-board Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
Head restraint computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Adjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heating Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
see Air conditioning Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

7
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 8
vpfaff7,

Index

L Locking Message memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lamp Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 101
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 From the inside (central locking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Lamps button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
see Indicator and warning lamp Luggage cover Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Licence plate lighting see Boot separator Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Lighting Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Message
see Lights see Message memory menu
Lights Mirror
M
Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 73 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . . 76 Main-beam headlamps Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 73 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Front foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Maintenance Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Own number sending . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Malfunction memory Run-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 see Message memory menu Telephone menu (on-board com-
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . . 88 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Modifying the programming
Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Maximum speed Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Switching off (display message) Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Operation (on-board computer) . . . . 99
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Operation (on-board computer) . . . . 99 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
LIM indicator lamp Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . 91
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . 94 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 113 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Load compartment load, maximum Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 254 DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 9
vpfaff7,

Index

N Overhead control panel Petrol

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Own number sending (mobile Plastic trim
Navigation menu (on-board com- phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Power windows
P see Side window
O Program selector button
Paint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Oil Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 87
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 R
Parking brake
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . . 97
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Parking lamps Radio
DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Changing a station (on-board
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Parking lock computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 102 Releasing manually (automatic see separate operating instructions
Lighting submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rain sensor
Message memory menu . . . . . . . . . 100 Parking position Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 107
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 R button
Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . . 95
Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 117 see Reset button
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Rear foglamp
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Rear-view mirror
On-board computer language . . . . . 102
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 191 Anti-dazzle (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operating system
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 67
see On-board computer
Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 114 Rear window
Outside temperature
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Display (on-board computer) . . . 91, 96

9
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 10
vpfaff7,

Index

Rear window heating Opening (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 191 Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 260
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Roof load, maximum . . . . . . . . . 253, 254 Settings
Remote control Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . . 68
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Roof switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Programming (garage door Run-on time (mobile phone) . . . . . . . 143 Factory (on-board computer) . . . . . 101
opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Setting the unit (on-board computer)
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . 217 S Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reserve Shift ranges
Seat
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 86
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . . 85
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Correct driver's seat position . . . . . . 71 Side window
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Seat belt
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 195 Side windows
Restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Seat ventilation Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Restraint systems
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 190 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Selector lever
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Soft top
Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reverse gear see Roof
Service
Engaging (automatic transmission) . 85 Spare wheel
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Engaging (manual transmission) . . . 85 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Service display
Reversing lamp Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
see ASSYST PLUS Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Service indicator Speed
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
see ASSYST PLUS Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Closing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed limiter
Closing (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Opening (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

10
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 11
vpfaff7,

Index

Speedometer Stowage space Technical data

Digital speedometer (on-board Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Rear wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Setting the unit (on-board com- Stowage well Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Boot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 137 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Submenu (on-board computer) . . . . 101 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Telephone
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 see Mobile phone
tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Supplemental Restraint System Temperature
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 see SRS Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . . 96
Standard display (on-board com- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Thermatic
Station Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 191
see Radio Surround lighting Thermotronic
Status line (on-board computer) . . . . 92 Switching on/off (on-board com- Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 191
Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 103 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Third brake lamp
Steering wheel Switching off the alarm Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64 ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . . 91 Time
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 T Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . . 97
Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . . 88 Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 103
Tail lamps
Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Setting the time (on-board com-
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 138 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . 97
Tank content
Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 TIREFIT kit
Calling up the range (on-board
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Stowage compartments Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . . 90

11
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 12
vpfaff7,

Index

Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 U W
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Towing eye Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Warning and indicator lamp
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Unlocking ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 210 LIM (Cruise control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 From the inside (central unlocking LIM (variable Speedtronic) . . . . . . . 113
Transmission button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Warning signal
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Transmission output (maximum) Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 241 V Washer fluid
Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Trip computer Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Vario-roof
Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 107 Wheel bolts
see Roof
Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vehicle
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Wheels
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 210, 211
Turn signal lamps General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Individual settings (on-board com-
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Two-way radio Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Windows
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 167
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Tyre pressure loss warning system 158 Windscreen
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tyre pressures Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 260
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 243
Tyres Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 242
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 260
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Windscreen washer reservoir
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

12
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 13
vpfaff7,

Index

Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 260

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 217
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 161
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Limiting the speed (on-board com-
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

13
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 14
vpfaff7,

Introduction

Protection of the environment

Protection of the environment RKeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- Returning used vehicles
sumption.
Mercedes-Benz will take back your
H Environmental note RRemove roof racks once you no longer Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
Daimler's declared policy is one of integra- need them. mentally-responsible manner, in accordance
ted environmental protection. RA regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- with the European Union (EU) End of Life
The objectives are for the natural resources ute to environmental protection. You Vehicles Directive.
which form the basis of our existence on should therefore adhere to the service The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
this planet to be used sparingly and in a intervals. vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in
manner which takes the requirements of RAlways
accordance with national regulations. For
have maintenance work carried
both nature and humanity into account. several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
out at a qualified specialist workshop,
You too can help to protect the environ- meeting all the legal requirements for a
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ment by operating your vehicle in an envi- design which allows for recycling and re-use.
ronmentally-responsible manner. Personal driving style There is a network of return points and dis-
RDo not depress the accelerator pedal assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend when starting the engine. cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
on the following factors: RDo not warm up the engine with the vehi- ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
ROperating conditions of your vehicle cle stationary. parts are constantly being developed and
improved. This means that your Mercedes-
RYour personal driving style RDrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- Benz will also continue to meet even the
tance from the vehicle in front. increased recycling quotas in the future in
You can influence both factors.
You should bear the following in mind: RAvoid frequent, sudden acceleration. good time. You can obtain further information
RChange
from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
Operating conditions gear in good time and use each
or your national hotline number.
RAvoid short trips as these increase fuel gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine
consumption. speed.
RMake sure that the tyre pressures are RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
always correct.
RDo not carry any unnecessary weight.

14
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 15
vpfaff7,

Introduction

Operating safety
Operating safety longer protect you and other persons as which have not been modified. Malfunc-
intended. In addition, there is the danger tions such as these can seriously jeopard-
G Risk of accident and injury that you may lose control of your vehicle ise the vehicle's operating safety and
All work on the vehicle and, in particular, and thus cause an accident. therefore your own safety.
work relevant to safety or on safety-related All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. You should thus have all work and modifi-
systems must be carried out at a qualified installations or modifications, should there- cations to electronic components carried
specialist workshop. The specialist work- fore be carried out at a qualified specialist out at a qualified specialist workshop.
shop must have the necessary specialist workshop.
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends G Risk of accident
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service A heavy impact to the underbody, tyres or
Centre for this purpose. wheels, for example when bottoming out on
rough terrain or driving over an obstacle at
G Risk of accident and injury high speed, could damage your vehicle. As
Some safety systems only function when a result, you could cause an accident. This
the engine is running. You should therefore also applies to vehicles which are equipped
never switch off the engine when driving. with underbody protection.
Otherwise the safety systems of your vehi- For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles,
cle may no longer protect you and other avoid bottoming out the vehicle in rough
persons as intended. In addition, there is terrain and, if necessary, have your vehicle
the danger that you may lose control of your checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle and thus cause an accident.
G Risk of accident
G Risk of accident and injury If work on electronic equipment and its
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations software is carried out incorrectly, this
made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables equipment could stop working. The elec-
under coverings, could cause the safety tronic systems are networked via interfa-
systems of your vehicle to stop working ces. Tampering with these electronic sys-
properly. The safety systems would thus no tems could cause malfunctions in systems

15
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 16
vpfaff7,

Introduction

Correct use
Vehicle registration Correct use

Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres Observe the following information when using
to carry out technical inspections on certain your vehicle:
vehicles to improve their quality or safety. RThe safety notes in this manual
If you did not purchase your vehicle from an RThe “Technical data” section in this manual
authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
RNational road traffic regulations
has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your RNational road traffic licensing regulations
vehicle is not registered in your name with
Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only G Risk of injury
inform you about vehicle checks if it has your Various warning stickers are affixed to your
registration data. vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a tion, and the attention of others, to various
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. dangers. Therefore, do not remove any
warning stickers unless the sticker clearly
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
states that you may do so.
about any change in address or vehicle own-
ership. If you remove the warning stickers, you or
others could be injured by failing to recog-
nise certain dangers.

16
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 17
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Exterior view ....................................... 18

Cockpit ................................................. 20
Instrument cluster .............................. 24
Multi-function steering wheel ............ 28
Centre console .................................... 29
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Door control panel .............................. 33
Stowage compartments ..................... 34

17
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 18
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Exterior view
Exterior view

18
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 19
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Exterior view
Function Page Function Page

1 Boot 9 Opening the bonnet 150

Opening and closing 58 Engine oil 151

2 Rear window heating 130 Coolant 154

3 Fuel filler flap 148 Vehicle battery 230

Fuel requirements 149 a Front lights 215

4 Doors b Towing 234

Opening and closing 56 c Headlamp cleaning system 76

Opening/closing in an d Wheels and tyres 155

emergency 210
Tyre pressure loss warning
5 Exterior mirrors 66 system 158

6 Roof Flat tyre 218

Opening and closing 132 Vehicle tool kit 172

Draught stop 135 Spare wheel* 172,

225
Boot separator 134
e Rear lights 216
7 Cleaning the windows 167
f Towing 234
8 Windscreen wipers 78

* optional
19
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 20
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Cockpit
Cockpit
Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles

20
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 21
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Cockpit
Function Page Function Page Function Page

1 Automatic transmission*: b Adjusts the steering wheel j Cruise control lever:

steering wheel gearshift electrically* 64
paddles* 88 • Cruise control 109
Switches steering wheel
2 Multi-function steering heating* on/off 64 • Speedtronic 112
wheel 28
c Adjusts the headlamp
3 Horn range 76

4 Instrument cluster 24 d Opens the bonnet 150

5 Overhead control panel 32 e Opens/closes the side win-

dows 79
6 Parktronic* warning dis-
play 116 f Light switch 73

7 Opens the glove compart- g Combination switch with:

ment 138
• Main-beam headlamps 75
8 Centre console 29
• Turn signals 75
9 Ignition lock 59 • Windscreen wipers 78
a Adjusts the steering wheel h Opens the door 57
manually 64

* optional
21
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 22
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Cockpit
Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles

22
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 23
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Cockpit
Function Page Function Page

1 Overhead control panel 32 b Opens/closes the side win-

dows 79
2 Parktronic* warning dis-
play 116 c Opens the bonnet 150

3 Cruise control lever: d Ignition lock 59

• Cruise control 109 e Adjusts the steering wheel

manually
• Speedtronic 112
f Adjusts the steering wheel
4 Instrument cluster electrically*
5 Horn Switches the steering
wheel heating* on/off
6 Multi-function steering
wheel 28 g Combination switch with:
7 Automatic transmission*: • Main-beam headlamps 75
steering wheel gearshift
paddles* 88 • Turn signals 75

8 Opens the door • Windscreen wipers 78

9 Light switch 73 h Centre console 29

a Adjusts the headlamp j Opens the glove compart-

range 76 ment 138

* optional
23
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 24
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, kilometres

24
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 25
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Instrument cluster
Function Page Function Page Function Page

1 1 SRS warning lamp 194 c < Seat belt warning k Status indicator, display
lamp 195 depends on the settings in
2 - ABS warning lamp 193 the on-board computer:
d A Main-beam indicator outside temperature1 or
3 LTurn signal indicator lamp 75 digital speedometer 96
lamp, left 75
e Fuel gauge l Speedtronic*: set limit
4 v ESP® warning lamp 194 speed 112
f Fuel filler flap location indi-
5 KTurn signal indicator cator: the fuel filler cap is to m Clock 104
lamp, right 75 the rear on the right-hand
side n Speedometer (can be set to
6 3 Brake system warn- display miles in the on-
ing lamp 194 g A Reserve fuel warning board computer) 102
lamp 197
7 Multi-function display 92 o Reset button
h Automatic transmission*:
8 Total distance recorder 95 gearshift program display 85 p Adjustment button for
instrument cluster illumina-
9 Trip meter 90 j Automatic transmission*: tion 90
selector lever position dis-
a ± Engine diagnostic q Adjustment button for
play 85
warning lamp 195 instrument cluster illumina-
tion 90
b Rev counter 90

1 Vehicles in the UK: the digital speedometer is always displayed instead of the outside temperature.

* optional
25
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 26
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, miles

26
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 27
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Instrument cluster
Function Page Function Page Function Page

1 SRS warning lamp 194 e Fuel gauge n Speedometer

2 ABS warning lamp 193 f Fuel filler flap location indi- o Reset button
cator: the fuel filler cap is to
3 Turn signal indicator lamp, the rear on the right-hand p Adjustment button for
left 75 side instrument cluster illumina-
tion 90
4 ESP® warning lamp 194 g Reserve fuel warning lamp 197
q Adjustment button for
5 Turn signal indicator lamp, h Automatic transmission*: instrument cluster illumina-
right 75 gearshift program display 85 tion 90
6 Brake system warning lamp 194 j Automatic transmission*:
selector lever position dis-
7 Multi-function display 92
play 85
8 Total distance recorder 95 k Status indicator, display
9 Trip meter depends on the settings in
90
the on-board computer:
a Engine diagnostic warning outside temperature2 or
lamp 195 digital speedometer 96

b Rev counter 90 l Speedtronic: set limit

speed 112
c Seat belt warning lamp 195
m Clock 104
d Main-beam indicator lamp 75

2 Vehicles in the UK: the digital speedometer is always displayed instead of the outside temperature.

* optional
27
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 28
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Multi-function steering wheel

Multi-function steering wheel Function Page

1 Multi-function display 92

Operating the on-board

computer

2 ts

Accepts or rejects/ends a
call 108

æ-

Selects submenus in the

Settings menu 101
• Adjusts the values

• Adjusts the volume

3 ÿè

Selecting menus: scrolls

back and forth 94

jk

Scrolls back and forth

within a menu 94

28
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 29
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Centre console
Centre console Function Page Function Page
Upper section 1 Opens the stowage com- 9 Deactivates/activates
partment 139 ESP® 51
Opens the cup holder* 136 a Activates/deactivates the
seat heating* for the left-
2 Controls COMAND APS* hand seat 63
and the audio system*, see
the respective operating b Activates/deactivates the
instructions AIRSCARF neck-level heat-
ing* for the left-hand seat 62
3 Activates/deactivates the
AIRSCARF neck-level heat- c Warning lamp for front-
ing* for the right-hand seat 62 passenger airbag 46

4 Activates/deactivates the d Controls Heatmatic 120

seat heating* for the right-
hand seat 63 Controls Thermatic* 122

5 Deactivates/activates Controls Thermotronic* 124

Parktronic* 115 Switches the rear window
6 Unlocks the vehicle 57 heating on/off 130

7 Switches the hazard warn- e Cigarette lighter* 141

i The layout of the buttons may differ ing lamps on/off 76
depending on the equipment in the vehicle.
8 Locks the vehicle 57

* optional
29
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 30
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Centre console
Function Page

f Opens/closes the ash-

tray* 140

or

Opens/closes the stowage

compartment 139

* optional
30
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 31
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Centre console
Lower section Function Page Function Page

1 Manual transmission: gear 9 Selects the left-hand exte-

lever 85 rior mirror 66

Automatic transmission*: a Adjusts the exterior mirrors 66

selector lever 85
b Selects the gearshift pro-
2 Primes/deactivates the gram for automatic trans-
interior motion sensor* 54 mission* 87

3 Roof switch 132

4 Primes/deactivates ATA*
(anti-theft alarm system) 52

Primes/deactivates tow-
away protection* 53

5 Parking brake 83

6 Opens the stowage com-

partment/telephone com-
partment* 138
i The layout of the buttons may differ
depending on the equipment in the vehicle. 7 Selects the right-hand exte-
rior mirror 66

8 Folds out the exterior mir-

rors electrically* 66

* optional
31
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 32
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel Function Page

1 ð Switches the interior

lighting on/off 78

2 ¡ Switches the auto-

matic interior lighting on/
off 77

3 X Switches the right-

hand reading lamp on/off 78

4 Transmitter buttons for

garage door opener* 144

5 Rear-view mirror 65

6 X Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 78

* optional
32
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 33
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Door control panel

Door control panel Function Page

1 Opens the door 57

2 Opens/closes the side win-

dow on right 79

3 Opens/closes the side win-

dow on left 79

33
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 34
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Stowage compartments
Stowage compartments

34
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 35
vpfaff7,

At a glance

Stowage compartments
Function Page Function Page

1 Glove compartment 138 9 Stowage compartment/

telephone compartment*
2 Right door stowage com- under the armrest 138
partment
a Stowage box in the rear wall
3 Stowage well under the between the seats 139
boot floor 137

4 Left door stowage compart-

ment

5 Upper stowage compart-

ment in the centre console 139

Cup holder* 136

6 Luggage net in the front-

passenger footwell 137

7 Lower stowage compart-

ment in the centre console 139

8 Stowage compartment in
front of the gear lever/
selector lever*

* optional
35
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 36
vpfaff7,

36
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 37
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety .................................. 38

Driving safety systems ....................... 50
Anti-theft systems .............................. 52

37
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 38
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
Occupant safety does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle G Risk of injury
occupants must wear their seat belt cor- The restraint system may not work as inten-
Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is
force limiters and airbags, are coordinated ded if the following components have been
equipped with airbags. This is because - on modified or work on these components has
restraint systems. They reduce the risk of the one hand - airbags are not deployed in
injury in defined accident situations and not been performed correctly:
all types of accident, as in some situations
thereby increase occupant safety. However, airbag deployment would not increase the Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat
seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- protection afforded to vehicle occupants, belts and anchorages, belt tensioners,
tect against objects penetrating the vehicle provided they are wearing their seat belt belt force limiters, airbags
from the outside. correctly. On the other hand, airbag deploy- Rwiring
To ensure that the restraint systems can ment only provides increased protection if Rnetworked electronic systems
deliver their full potential protection, you the seat belt is worn correctly because:
should ensure that: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail,
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted occupant in the best position in relation e.g. in the event of an accident in which the
properly (Y page 59) to the airbag deceleration force would normally be high
enough to trigger the systems, or they
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the could be triggered unintentionally. Never
(Y page 69) seat belt can more adequately prevent carry out any modifications on the restraint
Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are the occupant from being propelled systems. Never tamper with electronic
deployed (Y page 41) towards the force of the impact, and is components and their software.
thus better suited to prevent injury
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly
Therefore, in accident situations where an G Risk of accident and injury
(Y page 63)
airbag is deployed, it only provides protec- Always have maintenance work carried out
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- at a qualified specialist workshop which
tion in addition to the seat belt if the seat
fied belt is being worn correctly. has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
i An airbag increases the protection of
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt.
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
However, airbags are only an additional
purpose.
restraint system which complements, but

38
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 39
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
In particular, work relevant to safety or on The 1 warning lamp in the instrument depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudi-
safety-related systems must be carried out cluster lights up when the ignition is switched nal deceleration in a collision, in the first
at a qualified specialist workshop. If this on. It goes out no later than a few seconds stage the airbag control unit pre-emptively
work is not carried out correctly, the oper- after the engine is started. triggers the belt tensioners.
ating safety of your vehicle may be affec- G Risk of injury i The belt tensioners can only be triggered
ted. There is a risk of an accident and injury. if the belt tongue is correctly engaged in the
If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems
may be activated unintentionally or not be seat belt buckle.
triggered in the event of an accident with The front airbags are only deployed if there is
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) heavy braking. an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in
The SRS reduces the risk of occupants com- A malfunction has occurred if the 1 a longitudinal direction.
ing into contact with the vehicle's interior in warning lamp: Vehicles fitted with adaptive, dual-stage front
the event of an accident. It can also reduce Rdoes not light up when you switch on the airbags: when the first deployment threshold
the forces to which occupants are exposed ignition is reached, the front airbag is filled with
during an accident. enough gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The
Rdoes not go out after the engine has been
The SRS consists of: front airbag is only fully inflated if a second
running for a few seconds
R1 warning lamp threshold is reached within a few millisec-
Rlights up again once the engine is running onds due to the control unit having detected
Rbelt tensioners further deceleration.
In this case, have SRS checked immedi-
Rbelt force limiters ately at a qualified specialist workshop. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and
RAirbags airbags
Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force In the first stage of a collision, the airbag con-
1 warning lamp limiters and airbags trol unit evaluates the duration and direction
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in
The SRS functions are checked regularly In the event of a collision, the sensor in the order to determine whether it is necessary to
when you turn on the ignition and when the airbag control unit evaluates important phys- trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag.
engine is running. Malfunctions can therefore ical data such as duration, direction and force
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
be detected in good time. of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration.
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the Z
Based on the evaluation of this data and
rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc-

39
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 40
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt
must be deployed during – and not at the end cle force limiter, the force exerted by the seat
of – the collision. Rthe characteristics of the object with which belt on the seat occupant is reduced.
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehi- Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an
accidents. They are controlled by complex cle accident, pulling them close against the body.
sensor technology and evaluation logic. Factors which can only be seen and measured i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect
This process is pre-emptive in nature as after the collision has taken place do not play seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat
airbag deployment must take place during a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, belts.
the impact and must be adapted to provide nor do they provide an indication of it. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back
calculated, additional protection for the The vehicle may be deformed significantly, towards the backrest.
vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an
deployed in an accident. The belt force limiters are synchronised with
airbag being deployed. This happens if only the front airbags, which spread the forces
The different airbag systems work inde- parts which are relatively easily deformed are exerted by the belt force limiters on the occu-
pendently of each other. However, each affected and the necessary deceleration does pant over a greater area.
individual system depends on the type of not occur. Conversely, airbags may be
accident determined by the control system When the ignition is switched on, the belt ten-
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
in the first stages of the collision (head-on sioner is triggered:
minor deformations. This is the case if, for
collision, side impact, rear-end collision example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon- Ronly if the restraint systems are operational
and overturn) and the extent of the acci- gitudinal body members are affected and suf- (the 1 warning lamp lights up after the
dent (in particular, the vehicle's rate of ficient deceleration occurs as a result. ignition is switched on and goes out once
deceleration or acceleration). the engine is running)(Y page 39)
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Belt tensioners, belt force limiters Rfor each three-point seat belt in the front of
tion and the direction of the force are basi- the vehicle when the belt tongue is
cally determined by: The seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners.
engaged in the buckle
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the RIn the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-
sion buckle on the front-passenger seat if the sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
seat is not occupied. Otherwise the belt ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction
Rthe collision angle tensioner could be activated in an emer- during the initial stages of the collision
gency.

40
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 41
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
RIn certain situations if the vehicle over- When the airbags are deployed, you will hear bag as possible. The driver's seat posi-
turns, if the system determines that it can a bang, which will not cause any harm to your tion must allow the vehicle to be driven
provide additional protection hearing, and a small amount of powder may safely. The driver's chest should be as far
Ron the front-passenger side only if the also be released. The 1 warning lamp away from the middle of the driver's front
front-passenger seat is occupied and the lights up. airbag cover as possible.
belt tongue is engaged in the buckle The SRS/AIRBAG symbol indicates the loca- RMove the front-passenger seat as far
tion of the airbags. back as possible, in particular, if a child
When the belt tensioners are triggered, you
will hear a bang, which will not cause any G Risk of injury is secured in a child restraint system on
harm to your hearing, and a small amount of Airbags provide additional protection; they the seat.
powder may also be released. The 1 warn- are not, however, a substitute for the seat RVehicle occupants – in particular, chil-
ing lamp lights up. belts. dren – must not lean their head on the
G Risk of injury Observe the following notes to reduce the area of the window from which a head/
risk of serious or even fatal injury if an air- thorax airbag is deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners have been trig-
gered, they provide no additional protec- bag is deployed: RRearward-facing child restraint systems
tion in the event of another accident. RVehicle occupants — in particular preg- must not be fitted to the front-passenger
Therefore, have belt tensioners which have nant woman — must wear their seat belt seat unless the front-passenger front air-
been triggered replaced at a qualified spe- correctly at all times and lean back bag has been disabled. The front-
cialist workshop. against their backrest, which should be passenger front airbag is deactivated if a
Comply with safety regulations when dis- positioned as close to the vertical as pos- child restraint system with automatic
posing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes- sible. The head restraint must support child seat recognition is fitted to the
Benz Service Centre can provide details of the back of the seat occupant's head at front-passenger seat. The
these regulations. about eye level. 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
RAlways secure children less than lamp must be lit constantly.
1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in If you secure a forward-facing child
Airbags suitable child restraint systems. restraint system to the front-passenger
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts RAll
seat, you must move the front-passenger
vehicle occupants must select a seat
the movement of the vehicle occupant. seat as far back as possible.
position that is as far away from the air- Z

41
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 42
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
RMake sure there are no heavy or sharp- speed at which the airbag is required to G Risk of injury
edged objects in pockets of clothing. deploy. The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover been deployed. Do not touch them, other-
G Risk of injury wise you may burn yourself.
of the driver's front airbag, particularly
when the vehicle is in motion. The airbag's functionality can only be guar- Occupants are not protected by the airbags
anteed if the following parts are not cov- in the event of another accident. Have the
RDo not put your feet on the dashboard. ered and no badges or stickers are airbags checked at a qualified specialist
ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim. attached to them: workshop.
This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You RPadded steering wheel boss
could be injured if the airbag is deployed
RFront-passenger front airbag cover Front airbags
and you are holding the inside of the
steering wheel. ROuter side of seats The front airbags are designed to increase
protection for the driver's and front-
RDo not lean on the doors from inside the passenger head and chest.
vehicle. G Risk of injury
The driver's front airbag and front-passenger
RMake sure that there are no people, ani- When an airbag deploys, a small amount of
front airbag are deployed:
mals or objects between the vehicle powder is released. The powder may cause
short-term breathing difficulties to persons Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
occupants and the area of deployment of
suffering from asthma or other pulmonary of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
the airbag.
conditions. longitudinal direction
RDo not place any objects between the
In order to prevent possible breathing dif- Rif the system determines that airbag
seat backrest and the door.
ficulties you should leave the vehicle as deployment can offer additional protection
RDo not hang any hard objects, for exam- soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open to that provided by the seat belt
ple coat hangers, on the grab handles or the window to allow fresh air to enter the Rif the seat belt is fastened
coat hooks. interior. The powder does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup hold-
there is a fire in the vehicle. cle
ers, to the doors.
Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-
It is not possible to rule out the risk of inju-
tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a
ries caused by an airbag due to the high
longitudinal direction

42
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 43
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
the seat and the restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat may then be triggered
in the event of an accident and would have
to be replaced.

Head/thorax airbags
G Risk of injury
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-
Benz recommends that, for safety reasons,
you only use seat covers that have been
1 Driver's front airbag approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The 1 Head/thorax airbag
2 Front-passenger front airbag seat covers must be equipped with a spe-
cial tear seam for head/thorax airbags. Head/thorax airbags 1 inflate next to the
Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of the Otherwise, a head/thorax airbag may not outer seat cushions.
steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag deploy correctly and could fail to provide Head/thorax airbags 1 are deployed:
2 deploys in front of and above the glove the intended protection in the event of an Ron the side on which an impact occurs
compartment. accident. Appropriate seat covers can be
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Front-passenger front airbag 2 is only obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
deployed if the front-passenger seat is occu-
tion, e.g. in a side impact
pied or if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Head/thorax airbags are intended to offer Rif the system determines that airbag
warning lamp in the centre console is not lit
additional protection for the head and thorax deployment can offer additional protection
(Y page 46). This means that a child
when deployed. However, they do not protect to that provided by the seat belt
restraint system with automatic child seat
the arms.
recognition* has not been fitted to the front- Rif the seat belt is fastened
passenger seat or has been fitted incorrectly. Rindependently of the front airbags
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- Rindependently of the belt tensioners
passenger seat. The system might errone-
Ron the front-passenger side only if the
ously interpret this as a person occupying Z
front-passenger seat occupancy recogni-

* optional
43
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 44
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
tion system detects that the front- Do not expose the child restraint system to G Risk of injury
passenger seat is occupied direct sunlight. The metallic parts of the To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
child restraint system could heat up and the injury to the child in the event of a sudden
child could be burned by them. change in direction, braking or an accident:
Children in the vehicle If the children open the door other persons RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
If a child is riding in your vehicle, secure the could be injured. They could get out and twelve years of age must always be
child using a child restraint system appropri- injure themselves or be injured by a passing secured in special child restraint systems
ate to the size and age of the child and vehicle. on a suitable vehicle seat. This is neces-
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Pref- sary because the seat belts are not
erably, you should fit the restraint system on G Risk of injury
designed for children of this size.
a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load
RIf you fit a child restraint system to the
is strapped in throughout the trip. increases the risk of injury to the child in
the event of: front-passenger seat, you must move the
You can obtain information about the correct
front-passenger seat as far back as pos-
child restraint system from any Mercedes- Ran accident sible.
Benz Service Centre. Ra braking manoeuvre RChildren must never travel sitting on the
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care Ra sudden change of direction lap of another occupant. Due to the
products to clean child restraint systems. forces occurring in the event of a sudden
You can obtain information about this from Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside
the vehicle unless they are secured. You change of direction, heavy braking or an
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. accident, it would not be possible to
will find further information in the index
G Risk of injury under "Features". restrain the child. The child would be
Do not leave children unsupervised in the thrown against parts of the vehicle inte-
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child rior and be seriously or even fatally
restraint system. The children could injure Child restraint systems injured.
themselves on parts of the vehicle. They Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
could also be seriously or even fatally use the child restraint systems listed on G Risk of injury
injured by prolonged exposure to extreme (Y page 48). If the child restraint system is not fitted
heat or cold. correctly to a suitable vehicle seat, it can-

44
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 45
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
not perform its protective function. The Child seat on the front-passenger seat G Risk of injury
child cannot be restrained in the event of a If the front-passenger front airbag is not
sudden change of direction, heavy braking disabled:
or an accident. This may lead to serious or Ra child secured in a child restraint system
even fatal injuries. For this reason, when
on the front-passenger seat can be seri-
fitting a child restraint system observe the
ously and even fatally injured by the
manufacturer's installation instructions
front-passenger airbag deploying. This is
and correct use of the child restraint sys-
especially likely if the child is in the imme-
tem.
diate vicinity of the front-passenger front
The entire base of the child restraint system airbag when it is deployed.
must always be resting on the seat cushion.
Ra child must never be secured on the
Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under
the child restraint system. Warning on the front-passenger sun visor front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing
child restraint system.
Only use child restraint systems with their
original covers. Only replace damaged cov- Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
ers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. the rearmost position if you secure a
For safety reasons, you should only use child in a forward-facing child restraint
child restraint systems which have been system on the front-passenger seat.
approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehi- The front-passenger front airbag is not dis-
cles. abled if:
Rno child restraint system with automatic
child seat recognition is fitted
Rifthe 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child warning lamp on the centre console is
restraint system not lit
To draw attention to this danger, there is an
appropriate warning sticker on the dash- Z

45
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 46
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
board as well as on both sides of the sun G Risk of injury system cannot perform its intended pro-
visor on the front-passenger side. If the 5PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn- tective function in the event of an accident,
Information about recommended child ing lamp does not light up when the child and could even lead to injuries.
restraint systems is available at any restraint system is fitted, the front-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. passenger front airbag has not been disa- i The head/thorax airbag and the belt ten-
bled. If the front-passenger front airbag is sioner on the front-passenger side are still
Automatic child seat recognition on the deployed, the child could be seriously or active even if the front-passenger front air-
front-passenger seat even fatally injured. bag is disabled.
Proceed as follows: G Risk of injury
RDo not use a rearward-facing child Do not place items of electronic equipment
restraint system on the front-passenger on the front-passenger seat, e.g.:
seat. Rlaptops, if switched on
or Rmobile phones
ROnly use a forward-facing child seat on
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes
the front-passenger seat and move the
front-passenger seat to its rearmost or access passes
position. Signals from electronic equipment can
RHave the automatic child seat recogni- cause interference in the automatic child
1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning tion checked at a qualified specialist seat recognition sensor system. This can
lamp workshop. lead to a system malfunction. This may
cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
The front-passenger seat sensor system for To ensure that the automatic child seat rec- warning lamp to light up without there
child restraint systems detects whether a ognition on the front-passenger seat func- being a child seat with automatic child seat
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with auto- tions correctly, never place objects (such recognition fitted. This means the front-
matic child seat recognition has been fitted. as a cushion) under the child restraint sys- passenger airbag is not deployed during an
In such cases, the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG tem. The entire base of the child restraint accident. It is also possible that the
OFF indicator lamp 1 lights up. The front- system must always be resting on the seat 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
passenger airbag is deactivated. cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint

46
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 47
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
lamp will not light up if you turn the key in
the ignition lock to position 2.
Suitable positioning of the child restraint system

Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

Group 0: up to 10 kg; as recommended3, 4

Up to approximately 9 months

Group 0+: up to 13 kg; as recommended3, 4

Up to approximately 18 months

Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Universal4 or as recommended3, 4

Between approximately 8 months and 4 years

Category II/III: 15 to 36 kg Universal4 or as recommended

Between approximately 3½ and 12 years

3 Only use child restraint systems featuring automatic child seat recognition.
4 Move the front-passenger seat to the highest and rearmost position.

47
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 48
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
"Universal" category child restraint systems
can be recognised by their orange approval
label.

Example of an approval label on the child restraint

system
Recommended child restraint systems

Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat
ages ber recognition

Group 0: up to 10 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes

Up to approximately 9 PLUS5
months

Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Britax-Römer BABY SAFE E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes
Up to approximately 18 PLUS5
months

5 Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position.

48
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 49
vpfaff7,

Safety

Occupant safety
Weight categories and Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat
ages ber recognition

Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Britax-Römer DUO PLUS5 E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes

Between approximately 8
months and 4 years A 000 970 16 00 No6

Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; Britax-Römer KID 5 E1 03 301148 A 000 970 12 00 Yes

Between approximately
3½ and 12 years A 000 970 17 00 No6

5 Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position.

6 For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position.

49
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 50
vpfaff7,

Safety

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) G Risk of accident
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
the following driving safety systems: that the wheels do not lock when you brake. braking. This limits the steerability of the
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) This allows you to continue steering the vehi- vehicle when braking and the braking dis-
cle when braking. tance may increase.
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) upwards, regardless of road surface condi- then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. The
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even risk of your vehicle skidding is then
i In wintry road conditions, always use win- when you only brake gently. increased in certain situations.
ter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, You should therefore always adapt your
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv- G Risk of accident
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
ing safety systems described in this section Do not depress the brake pedal several weather conditions.
work as effectively as possible. times in quick succession (pumping).
Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pump-
G Risk of accident ing the brake pedal reduces the braking
The risk of an accident is significantly effect. BAS (Brake Assist)
increased by driving too fast. This is partic- BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
ularly the case when cornering on wet and tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
slippery roads and when driving too close Braking BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
to the vehicle in front. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel thus shortening the stopping distance.
The driving safety systems described in this a pulsing in the brake pedal. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
section cannot reduce this risk or override the emergency braking situation is over.
If ABS intervenes:
the laws of physics.
X Continue to depress the brake pedal with ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
For this reason, always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road and weather force until the braking situation is over. The brakes will function as usual once you
conditions. Maintain sufficient distance release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
For full braking application:
from other road users and objects on the
road. X Depress the brake pedal with maximum
force.

50
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 51
vpfaff7,

Safety

Driving safety systems

G Risk of accident RDo not deactivate ESP® under any cir- To deactivate/activate ESP®
If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking sys- cumstances. ESP® is activated automatically when the
tem remains available with full brake boost- ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far engine is running.
ing effect. However, braking force is not as necessary when pulling away. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
automatically increased in emergency
RAdapt your driving style to suit the pre- lowing situations:
braking situations and the stopping dis-
tance may increase. vailing road and weather conditions. Rwhen using snow chains
The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. Rin deep snow
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident Ron sand or gravel
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override
the laws of physics. G Risk of accident
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tyres Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
! The ignition must be switched off (key in described above no longer apply. ESP® will
and the road surface.
position 0 or I in the ignition lock) if: otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front
from the direction desired by the driver, one starts to spin.
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the or rear axle raised
vehicle. The engine output is also modified, if Ryou are having the handbrake checked If you deactivate ESP®:
necessary, to keep the vehicle on the desired on the brake dynamometer RESP® no longer improves driving stability
course within the scope of the laws of phys-
Application of the brakes by ESP®
could REngine torque is not limited and the drive
ics. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away otherwise destroy the brake system on the
on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta- wheels are able to spin. The spinning
front or rear axle. wheels produce a cutting effect for better
bilise the vehicle during braking.
i Only use wheels with the recommended traction.
When ESP® intervenes, the v warning
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function Rtraction control is still activated.
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
properly. RESP® still provides support when you
G Risk of accident
If the v warning lamp in the instrument brake.
cluster flashes, proceed as follows:

51
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 52
vpfaff7,

Safety

Anti-theft systems
i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more You should therefore always adapt your Anti-theft systems
wheels start to spin, the v warning lamp driving style to suit the prevailing road and
in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® weather conditions. Immobiliser
does not, stabilise the vehicle. The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
X To activate: press button 1 until the being started without the correct key.
v warning lamp goes out in the instru- X To activate: remove the key from the igni-
ment cluster. tion lock.
X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2
in the ignition lock.

ATA* (anti-theft alarm system)

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is primed and you open:
1 To deactivate/activate ESP® Ra door
X To deactivate: press button 1 until the Ra door using the emergency key element
v warning lamp lights up in the instru- Rthe boot lid
ment cluster.
Rthe bonnet
G Risk of accident Rthe glove compartment
ESP® is deactivated if the v warning
Rthe stowage space under the armrest
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up
continuously when the engine is running. The alarm is not switched off even if you close
The risk of your vehicle skidding is then an open door again.
increased in certain situations.

* optional
52
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 53
vpfaff7,

Safety

Anti-theft systems
Tow-away protection*
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while
tow-away protection is primed. This happens
if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for
example.

Priming tow-away protection

X Lock the vehicle using the key.
1 Indicator lamp Tow-away protection is primed after 1 To deactivate tow-away protection
approximately 30 seconds. 2 Indicator lamp
X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key.
Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm sys- To deactivate tow-away protection
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
tem is primed after approximately 15 sec- X Press button 1.
onds. Tow-away protection is automatically deacti-
vated when you unlock your vehicle using the Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the
key. X Lock the vehicle using the key.
key.
Deactivate tow-away protection manually to Tow-away protection remains deactivated
prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: until the vehicle is unlocked and locked
Switching off the alarm Ris again.
being transported
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car
The alarm is switched off. transporter
or Ris being parked on a movable surface, e.g.
X Press the Œ or ‹ button on the key. split-level garages
The alarm is switched off.

* optional
53
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 54
vpfaff7,

Safety

Anti-theft systems
Interior motion sensor* X Make sure that the boot lid is closed. 2 To deactivate the interior motion sensor
Only then can the interior motion sensor be
If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis- X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
primed.
ual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
X Lock the vehicle using the key. X Press button 2.
ment is detected in the vehicle interior while
the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for exam- The interior motion sensor is primed after Indicator lamp 1 flashes briefly.
ple, if someone breaks the side windows of approximately 30 seconds. X Lock the vehicle using the key.
your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's inte- The interior motion sensor remains deacti-
rior. vated until the vehicle is unlocked and
To deactivate the interior motion sen-
sor locked again.
Priming the interior motion sensor
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
X Make sure that: rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and
Rthe side windows are closed
Rpeople remain in the vehicle
Rthe stowage compartment under the Ranimals remain in the vehicle
armrest is closed.
Rthe windows remain open.
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the
grasp handles on the roof trim.
This will prevent false alarms.
X Make sure that the roof is closed.
The interior motion sensor can only be
primed when the roof is closed (with the
exception of vehicles for the Netherlands).
Vehicles for the Netherlands: the interior
motion sensor is primed even when the
roof is open. However, the roof should be
closed so as to prevent a false alarm. 1 Indicator lamp

* optional
54
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 55
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening and closing ........................... 56 Driving and parking ............................ 81

Key positions ....................................... 59 Transmission ....................................... 84
Seats .................................................... 59 Instrument cluster .............................. 90
Steering wheel .................................... 63 On-board computer ............................. 91
Mirrors ................................................. 65 Driving systems ................................ 109
Memory functions* ............................. 68 Air conditioning ................................. 118
Seat belts ............................................. 69 Opening/closing the roof ................. 132
Lights ................................................... 73 Loading and stowing ........................ 136
Windscreen wipers ............................. 78 Features ............................................. 140
Side windows ...................................... 79

55
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 56
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening and closing

Opening and closing i If you do not open either a door or the
boot lid after you have unlocked the vehi-
Key cle, it will automatically relock after approx-
The vehicle's equipment includes two keys imately 40 seconds.
with remote control. Each key contains an X To lock centrally: press the j button.
emergency key element.
The turn signals flash three times if the
The key is configured at the factory to cen-
doors and boot lid are closed. The locking
trally lock and unlock the following:
knobs in the doors drop down. The anti-
Rthe doors theft alarm system* and the immobiliser
Rthe boot lid are primed.
1 j Locking button
Rthe fuel filler flap 2 i Unlocking button for the boot lid
Rthe
Individual settings
glove compartment 3 k Unlocking button
Rthe stowage compartment in the centre 4 Battery check lamp You can change the settings of the locking
console system so that pressing the k button
i Vehicles with the convenience opening unlocks only the driver's door, the lockable
G Risk of accident feature: stowage compartments in the interior and the
Never leave children unsupervised in the You can also open and close the roof with fuel filler flap. This is useful if you frequently
vehicle. They could open a door from the the key (Y page 134). travel on your own.
inside, even if it has been locked, or start X To change the setting: press the k
the vehicle if the key is left in it. They could and j buttons simultaneously for
endanger themselves and others. You Factory settings
approximately six seconds until the battery
should therefore take the key with you X To unlock centrally: press the k but- check lamp flashes twice.
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are ton.
only leaving it for a short time.
The turn signals flash once. The locking
knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft
alarm system* is deactivated.

* optional
56
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 57
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening and closing

The key now functions as follows: Automatic locking feature
X To unlock the driver's door: press the The vehicle will lock automatically once you
k button once. have pulled away.
X To unlock centrally: press the k but- You can switch off the automatic locking
ton twice. function via the on-board computer
X To lock centrally: press the j button. (Y page 105).
i The vehicle is locked automatically when
Restoring the factory settings the ignition is switched on and the wheels
begin to turn. There is therefore a risk of
X Press the k and j buttons simulta- being locked out when the vehicle is being
1 Locking knob
neously for approximately six seconds until pushed or tested on a dynamometer.
the battery check lamp flashes twice. 2 Door handle

X Pull door handle 2.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle from
Opening the doors from the inside If the door is locked, locking knob 1 pops
the inside
up. The door is unlocked and can be
You can open a door from the inside at any opened. You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
time, even if it has been locked. from the inside. This feature may be useful if,
i When a door is opened, the side window for example, you wish to unlock the front-
on that side opens slightly. When the door passenger door from the inside or lock the
is closed, the side window closes again. vehicle before you pull away.

! The side windows will not open or close G Risk of accident

if the battery is discharged or if the side Do not leave children unsupervised in the
windows have iced up. It will not be possi- vehicle. They could open a door from the
ble to close the door. Do not attempt to inside – even if it is locked – and thereby
force the door closed. You could otherwise endanger themselves and others.
damage the door or the window.

57
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 58
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening and closing

Opening from the outside Closing from the outside
You can only open the boot lid after unlocking G Risk of injury
it first. Make sure that nobody can become trap-
i You can only unlock the boot lid when the ped as you close the boot lid.
vehicle is stationary and the roof is fully
opened or closed. i Do not leave the key in the boot. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
X To unlock centrally: press the k but-
ton on the key.

1 Locking button
2 Unlocking button

X To lock: press button 1.

X To unlock: press button 2.

Opening/closing the boot

G Risk of poisoning 1 Recess
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte- 1 Handle X Pull the boot lid down firmly using recess
rior if the engine is running and the boot lid 1.
is open. This could poison you. Therefore, X Pull handle 1.
you should make sure that the boot lid is X If necessary, close the boot lid from the
X Raise the boot lid. outside by pushing down the edge.
always closed when the engine is running.
X Lock the vehicle with the ‹ button on
! The boot lid swings upwards when the key if necessary.
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
enough space above the boot lid.

58
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 59
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seats
Locking the boot separately Key positions Seats
You can lock the boot separately7. If you then Points to remember
unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains
locked and cannot be opened. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, seat
adjustments can be made either manually or
X Close the boot lid.
electrically*.
X Remove the emergency key element from
G Risk of injury
the key (Y page 210).
The seats can still be adjusted when there
is no key in the ignition lock. For this rea-
son, children should never be left unsuper-
vised in the vehicle. They could become
trapped by a seat adjustment movement.
Ignition lock
G Risk of accident
} To remove the key
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehi-
$ Power supply for some consumers, such cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis-
as the windscreen wipers tracted from the road and traffic conditions
% Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and you could lose control of the vehicle as
and drive position a result of the seat moving. This could
$ Basic position cause an accident.
& To start the engine
% To lock separately
G Risk of injury
X Insert the emergency key element fully into Make sure that nobody can become trap-
the boot lock. ped as you adjust the seat.
X Turn the emergency key element clockwise Observe the notes concerning the airbag
to position %. system.
X Remove the emergency key element.
Z
7 Not available in all countries.

* optional
59
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 60
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seats
Secure children as recommended; see the Seat fore-and-aft adjustment your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
"Children in the vehicle" section. X Lift handle 1 and slide the seat forwards ported by the head restraint in the event of
or backwards. an accident. Never travel without a cor-
! When you move the seats, make sure that rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint.
there are no objects in the footwell or
X Release handle 1 again.
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could Make sure that you hear the seat engage
damage the seats and the objects. into position.

i The head restraints cannot be removed.

Backrest angle
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
Adjusting the seat manually X Pull handle 2 and adjust the backrest to
the required angle.
X Release handle 2 again.
The backrest must audibly engage.
X To raise/lower: push the head restraint
Seat height upwards or pull it down into the desired
position.
X Pull up or push down handle 3 repeatedly
until the seat has reached the desired
height.

1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Head restraint height

2 Backrest angle
3 Seat height G Risk of injury
Make sure that the central area of the head
restraint supports the back of your head at
about eye level. You could seriously injure

60
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 61
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seats
Adjusting the seat electrically* Seat cushion angle
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently
supported.
X Slide the button up or down in the direction
of arrow 4.

Backrest angle
X Slide the button forwards or back in the
direction of arrow 1.
X Raising/lowering: push the head restraint
1 Backrest angle Head restraint height downwards or pull it upwards into the
2 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment desired position.
G Risk of injury
3 Seat height
Make sure that the central area of the head
4 Seat cushion angle restraint supports the back of your head at Lumbar support*
about eye level. You could seriously injure
To support your spine, you can adjust the seat
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
backrests' contour.
ported by the head restraint in the event of
X Slide the button forwards or back in the an accident. Never travel without a cor-
direction of arrow 2. rectly adjusted and engaged head restraint.

Seat height
X Slide the button up or down in the direction
of arrow 3.

* optional
61
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 62
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seats
AIRSCARF neck-level heating* X Make sure the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating function
blows warm air around the heads of car occu- X To activate: press button 1.
pants. The warm air flows out of the holes in Three red indicator lamps in the button light
the head restraints. up. The blower starts up after a preheating
phase of seven seconds.
G Risk of injury
When AIRSCARF is in operation, very hot air X Press button 1 repeatedly until the
can flow from the vents in the head desired heating level is set.
restraints. This could cause burns to bare X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly
1 Upper backrest contour
skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. until all the indicator lamps go out.
Make sure that you reduce the heater out-
2 Lower backrest contour i The blower continues running for seven
put in time.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in seconds to cool down the heating ele-
The three red indicator lamps in the button ments.
the ignition lock. indicate the heating level you have selected.
X Turn thumbwheels 1 and 2 until the i If the battery voltage is too low, the AIR-
desired backrest contour has been set. SCARF neck level heating may switch off.

1 AIRSCARF neck-level heating

* optional
62
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 63
vpfaff7,

Controls

Steering wheel
Seat heating* X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or Steering wheel
2 in the ignition lock.
The three red indicator lamps in the button Points to remember
indicate the heating level you have selected. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
adjust the steering wheel either manually or
X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly
electrically*.
until all the indicator lamps go out.
G Risk of injury
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat The electrically adjustable steering
heating may switch off. wheel* can be adjusted when the key is
removed from the ignition lock. Therefore,
do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle as they could become trapped as
the steering wheel is adjusted.

1 Seat heating G Risk of accident

Only adjust the steering wheel when the
i The system automatically switches down vehicle is stationary and do not pull away
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately until the steering wheel adjustment mech-
five minutes. anism is locked in position. You might oth-
The system automatically switches down erwise drive without the steering wheel
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately adjustment mechanism being locked in
ten minutes. position. As a result you could be distracted
The system automatically switches off from road and traffic conditions by an unex-
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to pected movement of the steering wheel
level 1. and thereby cause an accident.
However, the steerability of the vehicle is
not affected.

* optional
63
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 64
vpfaff7,

Controls

Steering wheel
When you adjust the steering wheel, make X Pull handle 1 out completely. REasy-entry/exit feature (Y page 65)
sure that: The steering column is unlocked. RStoring settings (Y page 68)
Rthe steering wheel can be reached with
X Set the desired steering wheel position.
your arms slightly bent
X Push handle 1 in completely until it
Ryou can move your legs freely Steering wheel heating*
engages fully.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- The steering wheel is locked in position.
ment cluster clearly

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-

Adjusting the steering wheel man- cally*
ually

1 To switch on the steering-wheel heating

2 To switch off the steering-wheel heating
3 Indicator lamp

X To switch on or off: make sure that the

key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
1 Steering column height
1 Release handle X Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1
2 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment
2 Steering column height or 2.
3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment X Press the lever in the direction of arrow Indicator lamp 3 comes on or goes out.
1 or 2 until the steering wheel has
moved into the desired position. i The steering-wheel heating does not
switch off automatically.
You can find more information under:

* optional
64
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 65
vpfaff7,

Controls

Mirrors
Easy-entry/exit feature* Never leave children unsupervised in the Mirrors
vehicle. They could open the driver's door
The easy-entry/exit feature makes getting in Rear-view mirror
and thereby unintentionally activate the
and out of your vehicle easier.
easy-entry feature and become trapped. X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you
The steering wheel swings upwards when have a good overview of the traffic condi-
you: The most recent position of the steering
tions.
Rremove the key from the ignition lock wheel is stored when you switch off the igni-
tion or when you store a memory position
Ropen the driver's door when the key is in (Y page 68). Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle)
the ignition lock or in position 1.
You can activate and deactivate the easy-
The steering wheel is moved automatically to entry/exit feature via the on-board computer
the position previously set when the key is (Y page 106).
inserted into the ignition lock with the driver's
door closed.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trap-
ped when you activate the easy-entry/exit
feature.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop
the adjustment procedure. To halt the pro- 1 Anti-dazzle switch
cedure:
Rpress the steering-column adjustment X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch
switch 1 forwards or back.
Rpress one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons
The steering column stops moving immedi-
ately.

* optional
65
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 66
vpfaff7,

Controls

Mirrors
Exterior mirrors 2 Adjustment button X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
3 Right-hand exterior mirror 2 in the ignition lock.
G Risk of accident
X Briefly press button 1.
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
image. Objects are actually closer than 2 in the ignition lock. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
they appear. You could misjudge the dis- X Press button 3 for the right-hand exterior i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
tance from vehicles driving behind and mirror or button 1 for the left-hand exte- always folded out fully while the vehicle is
cause an accident, e.g. when changing
rior mirror. in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate.
lane. For this reason, make sure of the
actual distance from the vehicle driving X Press adjustment button 2 up, down, to
behind by glancing over your shoulder. the right or to the left until the exterior mir- Resetting the exterior mirrors
ror is set in a way which provides you with
The convex exterior mirrors give a larger field If the battery has been disconnected or has
a good overview of traffic conditions.
of vision. become discharged, the exterior mirrors
At low outside temperatures, the exterior mir- must be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold in
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
rors are heated automatically.
electrically* locking" function in the on-board computer
(Y page 106).
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button 1.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically*
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated via the on-board computer
1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
(Y page 106):

1 Left-hand exterior mirror

* optional
66
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 67
vpfaff7,

Controls

Mirrors
RThe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as the draught stop is fitted, the mirrors' auto- X Make sure that parking position for the
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- matic anti-dazzle function will not operate. exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
side. Incident light could then dazzle you. This is stored with the memory function
RThe exterior mirrors fold out again auto- may prevent you from observing the traffic (Y page 69).
matically as soon as you unlock the vehicle conditions, thereby causing an accident. In X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
and then open the driver's or front- this case, adjust the rear-view mirror man- the ignition lock.
passenger door. ually. X Make sure that button 2 for the exterior
i If you have activated this function and fold mirror on the front-passenger side is
pressed.
in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they
Parking aid* Engage reverse gear.
will not be folded out automatically. You X
can then only fold out the exterior mirrors The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
using button 1. side moves into parking position as soon as side moves to the stored parking position.
you engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors* Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror 10 km/h
on the driver's side automatically go into anti- Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and gaged reverse gear
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
Rif you press button 1 for the exterior mir-
sor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if ror on the driver's side
reverse gear is engaged and the interior light-
ing is switched on.
G Risk of accident 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side
If incident light from the headlamps of other 2 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger
vehicles is prevented from striking the sen- side
sor in the rear-view mirror, for instance if

* optional
67
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 68
vpfaff7,

Controls

Memory functions*
Memory functions* Calling up a stored setting
Storing settings G Risk of accident
You can store up to three different settings Only activate the memory function on the
using the memory button. driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary.
You could otherwise be distracted from the
The following settings are stored as a single
traffic conditions by the steering wheel and
memory preset:
seat moving of their own accord, and as a
RSeat and backrest position
result cause an accident.
RDriver's side: steering-wheel position
RDriver's
X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
side: position of the exterior mir- 1 Storage position switches 1, 2, 3 tion switch 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
rors on the driver's and front-passenger 2 Memory button M wheel and mirrors are in the stored posi-
sides
tion.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 59).
G Risk of injury
The memory function can also be used X On the driver's side, also adjust the steer- i The setting procedure is interrupted as
when the key has been removed. For this ing wheel (Y page 63) and the mirrors soon as you release the storage position
reason, children should never be left unsu- (Y page 66). switch.
pervised in the vehicle. They could other- X Press memory button M 2.
wise become trapped when moving the
X Press one of storage position switches 1,
seat or the steering wheel.
2 or 3 1 within three seconds.
G Risk of accident The settings are stored in the selected pre-
Only activate the memory function on the set position. A tone sounds when the set-
driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. tings have been completed.
You could otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions by the steering wheel and
seat moving of their own accord, and as a
result cause an accident.

* optional
68
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 69
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seat belts
Storing a parking position X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and Seat belts
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
To make it easier to park, you can store the lock. Seat belts are the most effective means of
front-passenger side exterior mirror position restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
in such a way that you can see the rear wheel X Engage reverse gear. pants in the event of an accident. This
on that side as soon as you engage reverse X Press button 3 for the exterior mirror on reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
gear. the front-passenger side. into contact with the vehicle interior.
You can store a parking position for the exte- X Use button 2 to adjust the exterior mirror
rior mirror on the front-passenger side using to a position which allows you to see the
the memory button. Wearing seat belts
rear wheel and the kerb.
You will find information about using the exte- The parking position is stored. G Risk of injury
rior mirror's parking position in the "Parking A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
aid" section (Y page 67). i If the mirror moves out of position, repeat which has not been engaged in the seat belt
the steps. You can adjust the exterior mir- buckle correctly, cannot perform its inten-
ror again after storing the setting. ded protective function. Under certain cir-
cumstances this could cause severe or
even fatal injuries.
Make sure that all occupants – in particular,
pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-
rectly at all times.
RThe seat belt must pass closely over your
body and must not be twisted. You
should therefore avoid wearing bulky
1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side
clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder
belt section must be routed across the
2 Adjustment button
middle of your shoulder – on no account
3 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger across your neck or under your arm – and
side pulled tight against your upper body. The
Z
lap belt must always pass across your lap

69
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 70
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seat belts
as low down as possible, i.e. over your RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under intended level of protection. Under certain
hip joints – not across your abdomen. If 12 years of age cannot wear the seat circumstances this could cause severe or
necessary, push down the belt strap belts properly. Therefore, always secure even fatal injuries.
slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up these children in suitable child restraint For this reason, check regularly that the
direction. systems on suitable vehicle seats. You seat belts are not damaged or dirty.
RSeat belts must not be twisted and must can find more information under "Chil- Always have damaged seat belts or seat
always be inside the belt loop of the seat. dren in the vehicle" in the "Safety" sec- belts that have been subjected to a load in
tion of the Owner's Manual. Follow the an accident replaced at a qualified special-
RDo not route the belt strap across sharp manufacturer's installation instructions ist workshop. Choose a qualified specialist
or fragile objects, especially if these are when fitting the child restraint system.
located on or in your clothing, e.g. spec- workshop which has the necessary special-
RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt ist knowledge and tools for the work
tacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt
strap could be damaged and tear in an if the seat belt is also being used by one required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
accident and you or other vehicle occu- of the vehicle's occupants. that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
pants could be injured. Centre for this purpose.
ROnly
G Risk of injury For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
one person should use each seat
The seat belt does not offer the intended mends that you only use seat belts which
belt at any one time. Children must never
level of protection unless the backrest is have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for
travel sitting on the lap of other occu-
almost vertical. Under certain circumstan- your vehicle.
pants. It would not be possible to restrain
the child in the event of a sudden change ces this could cause severe or even fatal
in direction, braking or an accident. This injuries.
could result in severe or even fatal inju- Before starting a journey, make sure that
ries to the child and other occupants. the seat is properly adjusted and that the
RPersons
backrest is almost vertical.
less than 1.50 m tall cannot
wear the seat belts correctly. For this G Risk of injury
reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m
A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt
tall in specially designed, suitable
that has been subjected to a load in an
restraint systems.
accident or modified no longer offers the

70
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 71
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seat belts
X Engage belt tongue 2 into buckle3. lamp then goes out if both the driver and the
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder front passenger have fastened their seat belt.
section of the belt to tighten the belt across i Further information about the < seat
your body. belt warning lamp (Y page 193).

Routing the belt

Correct driver's seat position
X Press release button 4 and guide belt
tongue 2 back towards belt loop 1.

Belt warning for driver and front

passenger
The < seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster reminds you that all occupants
1 Belt loop should fasten their seat belts. The < seat
2 Belt tongue belt warning lamp may light up continuously
3 Buckle or it may flash. Additionally, there may be a
4 Release button warning tone.
The < seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the warning tone ceases when the driver and
Routing the belt the front passenger have fastened their seat
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to belt.
an almost vertical position (Y page 59). For certain countries only: regardless of
X Pull the belt smoothly through belt loop whether the driver or the front passenger is
1. already secured, the < seat belt warning 1 Steering wheel
lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine 2 Seat belt
X Route the belt over the centre of the shoul- has been started. The < seat belt warning 3 Seat
der without twisting it.

71
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 72
vpfaff7,

Controls

Seat belts
G Risk of accident Make sure that: It should:
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehi- Ryou are as far away from the driver's front Rfit snugly across your body
cle is stationary. You will otherwise be dis- airbag as possible Rbe routed across the middle of your
tracted from the road and traffic conditions Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- shoulder
and you could lose control of the vehicle as tion Rrouted in your pelvic area across the hip
a result of the seat moving. This could
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly joints
cause an accident.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
G Risk of accident almost vertical position
Only adjust the steering wheel when the Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
vehicle is stationary and do not pull away
thighs are gently supported
until the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism is locked in position. You might oth- Ryou can depress the pedals properly
erwise drive without the steering wheel Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so
adjustment mechanism being locked in that the back of your head is supported
position. As a result you could be distracted at eye level by the central area of the
from road and traffic conditions by an unex- head restraint
pected movement of the steering wheel
and thereby cause an accident. X Check whether steering wheel 1 is adjus-
However, the steerability of the vehicle is ted properly (Y page 63).
not affected. Make sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
X Check whether seat 3 and the head arms slightly bent
restraint are adjusted properly Ryou can move your legs freely
(Y page 59).
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X Check whether you have fastened seat belt
2 properly (Y page 69).

72
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 73
vpfaff7,

Controls

Lights
Lights automatically, when the key is removed
from the ignition lock.
Light switch
! Switch off the side lamps, parking lamps
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched or dipped-beam headlamps when you leave
on even during the daytime. In some coun- the vehicle. This prevents the battery from
tries, daytime use of headlamps varies due to discharging.
legal requirements and self-imposed obliga-
tions. In these countries, dipped-beam head- Dipped-beam headlamp
lamps are switched on when the ignition is
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of
switched on. $ a Left-hand parking lamp the ignition lock or that the engine is run-
i If you drive in countries in which traffic % g Right-hand parking lamp ning.
drives on the opposite side of the road to & M Lights off/constant headlamp mode X To switch on: turn the light switch to
the country where the vehicle is registered,
( U Automatic headlamp mode/con- B.
oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the
stant headlamp mode The dipped-beam headlamps, parking
asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps.
) C Side lamps, licence plate and instru- lamps and licence plate lamps are switched
Have the headlamps changed to symmet-
rical dipped beam when driving in these ment lighting on. The parking lamp indicator lamp next to
countries. You can obtain information * B Dipped-beam headlamps or main- the light switch lights up.
about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service beam headlamps
Centre. , ¥ Front foglamp Constant headlamp mode
. † Rear foglamp
In countries in which constant headlamp
i The exterior lighting only switches off mode is not a legal requirement, you can
automatically if the automatic headlamp make this setting via the on-board computer.
feature or constant headlamp mode is acti-
vated. The exterior lighting switches off
Z

73
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 74
vpfaff7,

Controls

Lights
X Make sure that constant headlamp mode The automatic headlamp feature is only an you start your journey. Otherwise, your
has been set with the on-board computer aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle vehicle may not be visible and you could
(Y page 101).8 lighting at all times. therefore endanger yourself and others.
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
M or U. G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
When it is dark or foggy, turn the light When it is dark or foggy, turn the light
The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps
switch quickly from U to B. You switch quickly from U to B. You
and licence plate lighting are switched on
could otherwise cause an accident if the could otherwise cause an accident if the
when the engine is running.
headlamps were to switch off temporarily. headlamps were to switch off temporarily.
i When you turn the light switch to any
position other than M or U, the cor-
X To switch on: turn the light switch to i When the light switch is set to U you
U. cannot switch on the front or rear fog-
responding light goes on.
The side lamps are switched on and off lamps.
automatically when the key is in position
Automatic headlamp mode 1 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps
licence plate lighting are switched on or off and licence plate lighting are switched on X To switch on the front foglamps: turn the
automatically, depending on the brightness of automatically when the engine is running. light switch to the B or C position.
the ambient light. When the parking lamp or dipped-beam X Pull the light switch out to the first stop.
G Risk of accident headlamps are switched on, the indicator The ¥ green indicator lamp next to the
If the light switch is set to U, the head- lamp next to the light switch lights up. light switch lights up.
lamps may temporarily switch off due to X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
exposure to light, or the lights may not Front foglamps/rear foglamp light switch to the B position.
come on automatically if it is foggy. This
could endanger you and others. Therefore, G Risk of accident X Pull the light switch out to the second stop.
turn the light switch to B in the dark or If you suspect that driving conditions will be The † yellow indicator lamp next to the
in fog. foggy, turn the light switch to B before light switch lights up.

8 This is not possible in countries where constant headlamp mode is required by law.

74
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 75
vpfaff7,

Controls

Lights
X To switch off the front foglamps/rear X To switch on: press the combination Main-beam headlamp
foglamp: push in the light switch to the switch in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. X Turn the light switch to B or U.
stop. The corresponding turn signal indicator X To switch on: press the combination
The corresponding indicator lamp goes out. lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.
switch in the direction of arrow 1.
i If you only wish to indicate a minor change The main-beam indicator lamp in the instru-
Combination switch (main-beam of direction, press the combination switch ment cluster lights up.
headlamps, headlamp flasher, turn briefly in the appropriate direction. The cor- X To switch off: move the combination
signals) responding turn signal flashes three times.
switch back to its normal position.
The main-beam indicator lamp in the instru-
Turn signals Main-beam headlamps/headlamp flas- ment cluster goes out.
her
Headlamp flasher
X To switch on: briefly pull the combination
switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Combination switch
1 To indicate a right turn Combination switch
2 To indicate a left turn 1 Main-beam headlamp
2 Headlamp flasher

75
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 76
vpfaff7,

Controls

Lights
Hazard warning lamps Adjusting the headlamp range (vehi- Headlamp cleaning system*
cles with halogen headlamps)
i The headlamps are cleaned automatically
The headlamp range control allows you to if the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid"
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps function is operated five times while the
according to how your vehicle is laden. lights are on and the engine is running.
You can only adjust the headlamp range while When you switch off the ignition, the auto-
the engine is running. matic headlamp cleaning system is reset
and counting is resumed from 0.

Cornering light function (vehicles

1 Hazard warning lamp button
with bi-xenon headlamps*)
Specially designed headlamps light up the
X To activate: press hazard warning lamp area into which you are driving when turning
button 1. corners.
All turn signals flash. If you now activate a If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h,
turn signal, only those turn signal lamps on the cornering light function is activated either
the corresponding side of the vehicle will by the turn signals or when the steering wheel
1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range
flash. is turned. If you are driving at speeds above
X To deactivate: press hazard warning lamp Position Load 40 km/h the cornering light function is deac-
button 1. tivated.
0 Seats occupied
Switching on
1 Seats occupied, boot laden
X Make sure that the engine is running.
X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps.
X Turn thumbwheel for headlamp range 1 to
the position which corresponds to the load
in your vehicle.

* optional
76
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 77
vpfaff7,

Controls

Lights
X Switch off the fog lights. Interior lighting Automatic function
X Switch on the turn signal. X To switch on/off: press the ¡ button.

The cornering light on the same side as the The ¡ button pops up or goes down.
turn signal comes on, even if you turn the The interior lighting switches on if it is dark
steering wheel in the opposite direction when you:
after indicating.
Runlock the vehicle
or
Ropen a door
X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
direction. Ropen the boot
When in a forwards gear: the cornering Rremove the key from the ignition lock
lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. The interior lighting switches off after a delay.
When in reverse gear: the cornering light on Overhead control panel
You can set the delayed switch-off using the
the outside of the bend comes on. 1 ð To switch the interior lighting on/off on-board computer.
2 ¡ To switch the automatic function
i If the door is left open, the interior lighting
Switching off on/off
goes out after approximately five minutes.
3 X To switch the right-hand reading
X Switch off the turn signal. lamp on/off Emergency accident lighting
i The cornering light is activated until you 4 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp
If the interior lighting is set to automatic, the
turn the steering wheel back to the straight- on/off interior lighting is activated automatically if
ahead position and the turn signal switches the vehicle is involved in an accident.
off. The cornering light may remain lit for a X To deactivate: press the hazard warning
short time, but no more than three minutes. lamp button (Y page 76).
It then goes out, even if the turn signal is
still switched on. or
X lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
key.

77
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 78
vpfaff7,

Controls

Windscreen wipers
Manual control Windscreen wipers If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry
weather conditions, the windscreen wipers
Interior lighting may be activated inadvertently. This could
X To switch on/off: press the ð button. then damage the windscreen wiper blades
or scratch the windscreen.
Reading lamps For this reason, you should always switch
X To switch on/off: press the X button. off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
Depending on the equipment, the reading X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
lamps are in the overhead control panel or, 2 in the ignition lock.
for vehicles equipped with the light pack- The various wiper settings can be selected
age*, at the bottom of the rear-view mirror. as follows:

Combination switch
1 To switch on the windscreen wipers Single wipe
2 Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using X Briefly press the combination switch to the
washer fluid pressure point in the direction of arrow
Settings: 2.
0 Windscreen wipers off

I Intermittent wipe

II Continuous wipe, slow

III Continuous wipe, fast

! Vehicles with a rain sensor*:

* optional
78
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 79
vpfaff7,

Controls

Side windows
Wiping with washer fluid Side windows G Risk of injury
Press the combination switch beyond the Do not leave children unsupervised in the
X Opening/closing the side windows
pressure point in the direction of arrow vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
2. G Risk of injury restraint system. The children could:
Make sure that nobody can become trap- Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on
ped between the side window and the door parts of the vehicle
Intermittent wipe/rain sensor* frame as a side window is opened. Do not Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by
touch or lean against the side window dur- prolonged exposure to extremely high or
X Turn the combination switch in the direc- ing the opening procedure. You could
tion of arrow 1 to position I. extremely low temperatures
become trapped between the side window
The windscreen wipers will wipe at regular and the door frame as the window moves If children open a door, they could:
intervals. On vehicles with a rain sensor* down. If danger threatens, release the Rseriously or even fatally injure other peo-
the appropriate wiping frequency is set switch or pull the switch upwards to close ple
automatically according to the intensity of the side window again. Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring
the rain. themselves or be seriously or even fatally
G Risk of injury injured by a passing vehicle
Make sure that nobody can become trap-
Continuous wipe ped as you close a side window. If danger The switches for all side windows are located
X Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn threatens, release the switch or press the on the driver's door. There is also a switch for
the combination switch in the direction of switch a second time to open the side win-
arrow 1 to position II or III. dow again.

G Risk of injury
Switching off the windscreen wipers Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. Always take the key with you when
X Turn the combination switch to position 0. leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it
for a short time.

* optional
79
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 80
vpfaff7,

Controls

Side windows
the front-passenger side window on the front- Opening/closing the front side win- If a side window locks up again during closing
passenger door. dows and has reopened again slightly:
X To open or close: press the switch down X Immediately after the window locks up, pull
or pull it up beyond the pressure point and the switch upwards until the window is fully
hold it until the corresponding window is in closed.
the desired position. The side window is closed without the anti-
X To open or close fully: press the switch entrapment feature.
down or pull it up beyond the pressure point
and release it. Opening/closing all the side windows
X To stop: briefly press the switch down or
pull it up.

Switches on the driver's door Closing with increased force and without
1 Left the anti-entrapment feature
2 Right G Risk of injury
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in Make sure that nobody can become trap-
the ignition lock. ped and a serious or even fatal injury is not
caused as you close a side window with
i When the key is turned to position 0 or increased force or without the anti-entrap-
removed from the ignition lock, it is still ment feature. Roof switch on the lower centre console
possible to operate the windows until the 1 To open the side windows
driver's or front-passenger door is opened, If a side window locks up during closing and
has reopened again slightly: 2 To close the side windows
but for no longer than five minutes.
X Immediately after the window locks up, pull
the switch upwards until the window is fully
closed.
The side window is closed with more force.

80
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 81
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving and parking

X To open side windows: Pull back the roof Resetting the side windows Driving and parking
switch twice in rapid succession in the
direction of the arrow 1. Each side window must be reset if the battery Starting the engine
was disconnected or discharged.
All side windows open. G Risk of accident
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
i If you then close a side window using the the ignition lock. Do not keep any objects in the driver's foot-
well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
power window switch on the door, the tri- X Pull the switch upwards until the window is driver's footwell, make sure that they are
angular rear window remains open. To closed, and hold it in this position for correctly secured and that there is suffi-
close the triangular rear window, you must another second. cient clearance for the pedals.
close the side window using the roof
switch. Objects could otherwise get between the
pedals in the event of sudden braking or
X To close side windows: Push the roof acceleration. You may then no longer be
switch forward twice in rapid succession in able to brake, change gear or accelerate as
the direction of arrow 2 and hold it. intended. This may result in an accident and
The front side windows close first. After injury.
about a second, the rear triangular win-
dows close. G Risk of poisoning
Never leave the engine running in enclosed
i If the roof is open, only the two front side spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
windows close. monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss
i If the window is obstructed during clos- of consciousness or even death.
ing, the closing procedure is interrupted
and it opens again slightly.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.

i If you depress the brake when starting the

engine, pedal travel will be unusually long
and there will be less pedal resistance.

81
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 82
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving and parking

Manual transmission Automatic transmission* release it immediately. The engine then
starts automatically.
X Turn the key to position 3 (Y page 59) in
the ignition lock and release it as soon as
the engine is running.

Pulling away
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
X Shift to neutral.
P Park position with selector lever lock Only change into reverse gear when the
R Reverse gear vehicle is stationary.
X Apply the handbrake (Y page 83).
N Neutral Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
Further information about the manual trans- D Drive position wheels when pulling away on slippery
mission (Y page 85). roads. You could otherwise damage the
X Before starting, make sure P is selected. drive train.
i The engine can also be started when the ! AMG vehicles: at low engine tempera-
selector lever is in position N. tures (below + 20° C), the maximum engine
Further information about the automatic speed is limited in order to protect the
transmission (Y page 85). engine. Avoid driving at full throttle when
the engine is cold in order to protect the
Starting the engine engine and avoid inconveniences.

i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
You can also use the "touch-start" function. pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
To do this, turn the key to position 3 and drop down.

* optional
82
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 83
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving and parking

You can open the doors from the inside at X Release the brake pedal. Handbrake
any time. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
ing feature (Y page 105). i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
Manual transmission catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
X Depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift to either first or reverse gear.
Parking
X Slowly release the clutch pedal and
depress the accelerator pedal. G Risk of fire
Make sure that the exhaust system does 1 Release button
! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- not under any circumstances come into
ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam- 2 Handbrake
contact with easily ignitable material such
age the vehicle. as dry grass or petrol. The material could X To release: depress the brake pedal and
otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. keep it depressed.
Automatic transmission* On vehicles with automatic transmission*,
the selector lever lock is released.
i It is only possible to move the selector
lever to the desired position if you depress X Apply handbrake 2 slightly.
the brake pedal. Only then is the selector X Press release button 1 on handbrake 2
lever lock released. and move the handbrake down to the stop.
X Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. X The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument
X Release the handbrake. cluster goes out.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.

i Wait for the shift process to complete

before pulling away.

* optional
83
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 84
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
X To apply: pull handbrake 2 up firmly. Vehicles with automatic transmission* Transmission
The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument X Move the selector lever to P. Introduction to the transmission
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 59) in
G Risk of accident
i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels the ignition lock and remove it.
The movement of the pedals must not be
towards the kerb. The immobiliser is activated.
impaired in any way. Do not keep any
objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure
that floormats or carpets are correctly
Stopping the engine
secured and that there is sufficient clear-
G Risk of accident ance for the pedals.
If the engine is not running, there is no
G Risk of accident
power assistance for the steering and
brakes. Steering and braking then takes Do not change down for additional engine
much more effort. braking on a slippery road surface. This
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
As a result, you might lose control of the
grip and the vehicle could skid. This could
vehicle, cause an accident and injure your-
cause you to lose control of your vehicle
self and others.
and cause an accident.
Do not switch off the engine while driving.

Vehicles with manual transmission

X Shift to either first or reverse gear.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 59) in
the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.

* optional
84
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 85
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
Manual transmission X Move the gear lever firmly to the left 2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)*
beyond the point of resistance and then
forwards. The current shift range and gearshift program
(S/C) or (S/C/M)* appear in the display of
the speedometer.
Automatic transmission* When the selector lever is in position D, you
can influence the gearshifts made by the
automatic transmission by:
Rrestricting the shift range

Rchanging gear yourself

Selector lever positions

! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,
you must press the shift lever to the right. ì Park position
You could otherwise shift unintentionally Prevents the vehicle from rolling
into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the trans- away when stopped. Only move the
mission. selector lever to P when the vehicle
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the is stationary.
individual gears. i The key can only be removed
If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- when the selector lever is in posi-
mission braking), this can cause the engine tion P. If the key is removed from
to overspeed, leading to engine damage. the ignition lock, the selector
lever is locked in position P.
Engaging reverse gear
í Reverse gear
! Only engage reverse gear when the vehi- Only move the selector lever to R
cle is stationary, otherwise the transmis- when the vehicle is stationary.
sion could be damaged. 1 Selector lever position/shift range Z

* optional
85
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 86
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
ë Neutral gram selected. This also extends the shift Shift ranges
range.
Releasing the brakes will allow you When the selector lever is in position D, it is
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to X To shift down: briefly press the selector possible to restrict or derestrict the shift
push it or tow it. lever to the left towards D–. range for the automatic transmission.
Do not move the selector lever to The automatic transmission shifts down to X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
N while you are driving. The auto- the next gear, depending on the gear cur- towards D+ or to the left towards D–.
matic transmission could other- rently selected. This also restricts the shift The shift range selected is shown in the
wise be damaged. range. display. The automatic transmission shifts
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only as far as the selected gear.
only move the selector lever to N if i To prevent the engine from overrevving,
the vehicle is in danger of skidding, the automatic transmission does not shift i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
e.g. on icy roads. down if you push the selector lever towards range is reached and you continue to accel-
D– while driving at too high a speed. erate, the automatic transmission shifts up
ê Drive in order to prevent the engine from over-
X To derestrict the shift range: press and
The automatic transmission revving even if the shift range is restricted.
hold the selector lever towards D+ until D
changes gear automatically. All is shown once more in the display.
forward gears are available. Driving situation
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D. è The braking effect of the engine can
be used in this position.
One-touch gearshifting X To select the most effective shift
range: press and hold the selector lever to
When the selector lever is in position D, you the left towards D–.
can perform gearshifts yourself, even on vehi- The automatic transmission will shift to a
cles with automatic transmission. range which allows ideal acceleration and
X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever deceleration. To do this, the automatic
to the right towards D+. transmission will shift down one or more
The automatic transmission shifts up to the gears.
next gear, depending on the gearshift pro-

86
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 87
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
ç To use the braking effect of the S Sport For all normal driving con- Driving tips
engine on downhill gradients and ditions Accelerator pedal position
for driving:
C Comfort For comfort mode Your style of driving influences how the auto-
Ron steep mountain roads
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rin mountainous terrain Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rin arduous conditions ! Only press program selector button 1 Rmore throttle: late upshifts
when the selector lever is in position P, N
æ To use the braking effect of the or D. Kickdown
engine on extremely steep downhill
X Press program selector button 1 repeat- Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
gradients and long downhill
stretches. edly until the letter (C/S) for the desired X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
gearshift program appears in the speed- pressure point.
ometer display. The transmission shifts to a lower gear
Comfort mode C is characterised by the fol- depending on the engine speed.
Program selector button
lowing: X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Ran increase in traction. This improves the desired speed is reached.
driving stability of the vehicle on slippery The automatic transmission shifts back up.
road surfaces, for example.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. The vehicle is driven at lower
engine speeds and the wheels are less
likely to spin.

1 Program selector button

87
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 88
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
Steering wheel gearshift paddles* Upshifting selected, the automatic transmission will
and manual gearshift program* X Pull right-hand paddle 2. resume the relevant gearshift program
when you restart the engine.
i The full range of functions of the steering The automatic transmission shifts up to the
wheel shift paddles and the manual gear- next gear. If you are not driving in manual
shift program are only available once oper- gearshift program M, then the shift range Manual gearshift program
ating temperature is reached. will be derestricted.
In the manual gearshift program M, you can
change gear using the steering wheel gear-
Downshifting
Steering wheel gearshift paddles shift paddles or the selector lever. The man-
G Risk of accident ual gearshift program M can be selected
It is possible to shift gear using either the Do not change down for additional engine using the program selector button.
steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selec- braking on a slippery road surface. This
tor lever. could cause the drive wheels to lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.

X Pull left-hand paddle 1.

The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear. If you are not driving in man-
ual gearshift program M, the shift range will
be restricted.

i When the selector lever is in position P,

N or R, you cannot change gear using the 1 Program selector button
steering wheel gearshift paddles.
1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down
If the manual gearshift program M has been
2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up selected and you restart the engine, the
automatic transmission will switch to an
automatic gearshift program. If the auto-
matic gearshift program S or C has been

* optional
88
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 89
vpfaff7,

Controls

Transmission
S Sport For all normal driving con- Vehicles with AMG engines X Pull the left-hand paddle on the steering
ditions wheel (Y page 88).
! In manual gearshift program M, the auto-
matic transmission does not shift up auto- The automatic transmission shifts down to
C Comfort For comfort mode matically even when the limiting speed for the next gear.
the current gear is reached. When the lim-
M Manual For manual gearshifting i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut
hand gearshift paddle until the transmis-
to prevent the engine from overrevving.
sion selects the optimum gear depending
X To activate: press program selector but- You must make sure that the engine speed
on the speed.
ton 1 repeatedly until M appears in the does not reach the red area of the rev coun-
display. ter. There is otherwise a risk of engine
Kickdown
damage.
If the selector lever is in position D, you can i It is not possible to use kickdown in the
shift up or down through the gears. The gear X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol manual gearshift program M on vehicles
currently selected and engaged is shown in appears in the display instead of M. with AMG engines.
the display.
X To deactivate: press program selector Downshifting You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual gearshift program M.
button 1 repeatedly until S or C appears G Risk of accident
in the display. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Do not change down for additional engine
pressure point.
braking on a slippery road surface. This
Upshifting could cause the drive wheels to lose their The transmission shifts to a lower gear
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right grip and the vehicle could skid. depending on the engine speed.
towards D+
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
i It is not possible to shift gears using the
or steering wheel gearshift paddles during
towards D-
X Pull the right-hand paddle on the steering kickdown.
wheel (Y page 88). or
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.

89
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 90
vpfaff7,

Controls

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Activating the multi-function display Resetting the trip meter
Points to remember X Switch on the ignition. X Select the standard display menu
The multi-function display is also activated (Y page 95).
You will find an illustration of the instrument
cluster in the "At a glance" section when you: X Press and hold reset button 4 on the left-
(Y page 24). Rswitch on the lights hand side of the instrument cluster until the
trip meter is reset.
G Risk of accident Rpress the J reset button on the left-hand
No further messages can be displayed if side of the instrument cluster
there is a malfunction in the instrument Ropen the driver's door Rev counter
cluster and/or the multi-function display.
The multi-function display lights up for about The red band in the rev counter indicates the
This means that you will not see information
30 seconds when you open a door and then engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is
about the driving situation, such as the
do nothing else. interrupted to protect the engine when the
speed, outside temperature, warning/indi-
red band is reached.
cator lamps, display messages or system
failures. The vehicle's handling character- Adjusting the instrument cluster ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
istics may be affected. Adjust your driving lighting Doing so will damage the engine.
style and speed accordingly.
You can only brighten or dim the instrument H Environmental note
Immediately consult a qualified specialist
cluster lighting when it is dark. Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this
workshop which has the necessary special-
X Brighter or dimmer: briefly press the , increases your vehicle's consumption
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
or . adjusting knob on the left-hand side unnecessarily and pollutes the environ-
work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
of the instrument cluster (Y page 24). ment through increased emissions.
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- The brightness of the instrument cluster
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- lighting changes by one level. There are
related systems must be carried out at a several possible levels.
qualified specialist workshop.

90
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 91
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Outside temperature display On-board computer Multi-function steering wheel
G Risk of accident Points to remember You can control the multi-function display and
The road surface may be icy, especially in the settings in the on-board computer with
The on-board computer is activated as soon the buttons on the multi-function steering
wooded areas or on bridges, even if tem- as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
peratures are just above freezing point. The wheel.
lock. You can use the on-board computer to
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your call up information relating to your vehicle
driving style. You should therefore always and to make and/or adjust settings.
adapt your driving style and speed to suit
You can call up the next service due date,
the weather conditions.
select the display language for the instrument
There is a short delay before a change in out- cluster and set other functions.
side temperature is displayed. G Risk of accident
Only use the on-board computer when road
and traffic conditions permit. You would
otherwise be distracted and unable to con-
centrate properly on driving, and could
cause an accident.
The on-board computer shows information in
the multi-function display.

91
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 92
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
1 Multi-function display j Briefly press: in a menu to You can think of the configuration of the
k scroll forwards or back. menus and the functions within a menu as a
2 s Accepts or rejects a call* Select a stored station, an circle:
t audio track or a video scene in X Press the è orÿ button repeatedly
æ RSelects submenus in the the Audio*/DVD* menu*. to call up individual menus in sequence.
ç Settings menu Change to the telephone book X Press the k or j button to call up
RChanges values and select a name or number the functions within a menu.
in the Telephone* menu.
RAdjusts the volume Unlike other menus, the Settings menu con-
ROperates the RACETIMER9 j Press and hold: in the tains a number of submenus (Y page 101).
k Audio*/DVD* menu to select The number of menus depends on the equip-
3 è Selecting menus: scrolls for- the next or previous station ment in your vehicle.
ÿ wards or back and select an audio track
using the fast scrolling fea-
ture.
Multi-function display
To start the fast scrolling fea- The multi-function display shows you values
ture in the telephone book in and settings as well as any display messages
the Telephone* menu. that may have been generated.

Several functions are combined thematically

in the menus.
For example, the Audio/*/DVD* menu con-
tains functions for operating the radio* or CD
player*. The functions can be used to either
look up information or to change settings for
your vehicle.

9 Only on AMG vehicles.

* optional
92
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 93
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
2 Status bar with outside temperature or
speed (Y page 103)

1 Display area for menus or submenus

93
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 94
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Menus and submenus

94
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 95
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Function Function Depending on the audio system fitted, the
Audio*, Navigation* and Telephone*
1 Standard display menu 4 Navigation* menu (NAV) menus are slightly different. The examples
(Y page 95) (Y page 100) given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles
RTotal distance recorder equipped with COMAND APS*.
(Y page 95) 5 Message memory menu10 (fault and
warning messages) (Y page 100)
RTyre pressure loss warning sys- Standard display menu
tem* (Y page 158) 6 Settings menu (Y page 101)
RResetting to factory settings
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94).
RCoolant temperature (Y page 96)
(Y page 101) Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
RDigital speedometer or outside tem-
RSelecting
ing wheel.
perature (Y page 96) a submenu (Y page 101)
X Press the è or · button to select the
RASSYST PLUS service display
7 Trip computer menu (Y page 107) standard display.
(Y page 165)
RConsumption statistics
REngine oil level* (Y page 151) (Y page 107)
RRange (Y page 107)
2 AMG* menu (Y page 96)

3 Audio*/DVD* menu (Y page 98) 8 Telephone* menu (Y page 108)

RRadio station (Y page 99)

RAudio drive or media** This is what the displays look like when you Standard display
(Y page 99) scroll through the menus.
1 Total distance recorder
The generic terms in the table overview are
RDVD video* (Y page 99) 2 Trip meter
intended to help you navigate through the
menus. The terms themselves are not always
displayed in the multi-function display.

10 This menu is only visible if there is a display message available.

* optional
95
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 96
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
You can select the following functions in the concentration, the reading may rise to AMG* menu
Basic display menu by pressing the j or 120 †.
k button: These functions are only available on AMG
At high outside temperatures and when driv-
vehicles.
Rtyre pressure loss warning sys- ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise
tem* (Y page 158) to the end of the scale. i Menu overview: see (Y page 94).
Rcoolant temperature Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
Displaying the digital speedometer or ing wheel.
Rdigital speedometer or outside tempera- outside temperature X Press the è or · button to select the
ture
If you have selected the digital speedometer AMG menu.
RASSYST PLUS service display for the Status line (Y page 103), you can
(Y page 165) switch the display to the outside temperature
Rengine oil level* (Y page 151) here11.
X Press the j or k button to select the

Displaying the coolant temperature digital speedometer or the outside temper-

ature.
X Press the j or k button to select the
coolant temperature. 1 Gear indicator
2 Upshift instruction
3 Engine oil temperature
In the manual gearshift program, the menu is
displayed in red when the engine reaches the
overrevving range. You will also see shift up
Example illustration showing the digital speedom- instruction 2. The shift up instruction is the
eter displayed
only thing shown in the multi-function display
Under normal driving conditions, with the cor-
until you shift gear.
rect anti-corrosion and antifreeze additive

11 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.

* optional
96
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 97
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
The engine oil temperature gauge flashes if Storing the lap time and starting a new lap
the engine oil temperature has not reached It is possible to store a maximum of nine laps.
80 †. Avoid driving at full engine output dur- X Press the ç button to show the inter-
ing this time.
mediate time during timing.
Displaying the on-board voltage The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
X Press the j button repeatedly until the 1 Gear indicator X Press the ç button again within 5 sec-
on-board voltage appears. 2 RACETIMER onds.
3 Lap The displayed intermediate time is stored
You can start the RACETIMER when the as a lap time.
engine is running or if the key is in position Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is
2 in the ignition lock. timed from when the intermediate time is
X To start: press the æ button to start the
called up.
RACETIMER.
1 Gear indicator X To display the intermediate time: press
2 On-board voltage the ç button to show the intermediate
time.
RACETIMER The intermediate time is displayed for five
seconds.
The RACETIMER allows time measurements
X To stop: press the æ button to stop the 1 Gear indicator
to be saved.
RACETIMER. 2 RACETIMER
While you have the RACETIMER displayed,
you will not be able to adjust the volume using The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you 3 Fastest lap time (best lap)
the æ and ç buttons. stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 4 Lap
1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key
X Press the j button repeatedly until the to position 2 or 3 and then press the æ
RACETIMER appears. button, timing is continued.

97
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 98
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Resetting the current lap
X Press the æ button to stop the RACE-
TIMER.
X Press the ç button to reset the lap time
to "0".

Deleting all laps 1 RACETIMER overall evaluation 1 Lap

If you have switched off the engine, the RACE- 2 Total time driven 2 Lap time
TIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps 3 Top speed 3 Top speed during lap
are deleted. 4 Distance covered 4 Lap length
It is not possible to delete a single stored lap 5 Average speed 5 Average lap speed
on its own.
X Press the æ button to stop the RACE- X Press the j or k button to select a
TIMER. Lap evaluation different lap evaluation.
X Press the 4 reset button on the left of the This function is only available if you have
instrument cluster twice. stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER. Audio*/DVD* menu
X Press the æ button to start the RACE-
X Press the j button repeatedly until a lap Using the functions in the Audio/DVD menu
TIMER.
evaluation appears. you can operate the audio system* or
All laps are deleted.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. COMAND APS*. If the audio system* or
You are able to identify the fastest lap by COMAND APS* is switched off, the multi-
Overall evaluation flashing symbol 1. function display shows the AUDIO off mes-
This function is only available if you have sage.
stored at least one lap and have stopped the i Menu overview: see (Y page 94).
RACETIMER.
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
X Press the j button repeatedly until the
ing wheel.
overall evaluation appears.

* optional
98
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 99
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
X Use the è or · button to select the or medium, see the separate operating
Audio/DVD menu. instructions.
X To select the next or previous track:
Selecting a radio station briefly press the j or the k button.
You can only store new stations using the X To select a channel from the channel list
audio system* or COMAND APS*. Please (fast scrolling): press and hold the j
refer to the separate operating instructions 1 Waveband (channel preset number only if or k button.
for notes on how to do this. the channel is stored)
2 Station
X Switch on the audio equipment* or
COMAND APS* and select the radio; see i DAB* radio mode12 (Digital Audio Broad-
the separate operating instructions. casting) – see the separate operating
X To select a stored station: briefly press instructions.
the j or k button.
X To select a channel from the channel Operating the audio player or audio Example
list: press and hold the j or k but- media* 1 Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*)
ton. 2 Current track
Audio data from different audio players or
X To select a station using the station media can be played back depending on the In audio AUX mode, the current track is not
search (only if no station list is being equipment fitted in the vehicle. displayed.
received): press and hold the j or X Switch on the audio equipment* or
k button.
COMAND APS* and select the audio player Operating the DVD video*
X Switch on COMAND and select DVD video
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the j or k button to select a
scene.

12 Only for certain countries.

* optional
99
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 100
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Route guidance inactive Message memory menu
The multi-function display shows the direc- Previous display messages can be called up
tion of travel. in the Message memory menu. You will only
see the Message memory menu if there are
any display messages.
G Risk of accident
1 Disc number (only for DVD changer*) The on-board computer only records and
2 Current scene displays messages and warnings from cer-
tain systems. For this reason, you should
always make sure that your vehicle is safe
1 Direction of travel
Navigation* menu to drive. You could otherwise cause an acci-
dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.
In the Navigation menu, the multi-function
display shows information from the naviga- Route guidance active
Switching off the ignition clears the Message
tion system. The following may appear in the multi-func- memory except for the highest priority dis-
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94). tion display: play messages. The on-board computer will
delete these display messages only after the
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- reason for the message has been rectified.
ing wheel.
X Press è or ÿ to select the Naviga-
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94).
tion menu.
Displaying messages
X Switch on the audio system* or COMAND
APS* (see separate operating instruc- Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
tions). ing wheel.

* optional
100
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 101
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
X Press the è or · button repeatedly Resetting to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu
until either the original menu or the Mes-
For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: X Press è or · to select the Set-
sage memory menu appears.
permanent Speedtronic can only be set in the tings menu.
If the Message memory menu does not Vehicle submenu. The Headlamp mode
appear, there are no display messages. X Press the j button to call up the selec-
function in the Lighting submenu is only
If there are messages, the following mes- tion of submenus.
reset if the vehicle is stationary.
sage may appear in the multi-function dis- A submenu appears. There are several sub-
X Press è or · to select the Set- menus.
play, for example: 2 messages.
tings menu.
X Press the j or k button to call up a
X Press and hold reset button Jon the left
display message.
of the instrument cluster for approximately
You can scroll through the display mes- three seconds.
sages in sequence. The possible display
A prompt appears in the multi-function dis-
messages are explained in the "Practical
play asking you to press the reset button
advice" section (Y page 174).
again to confirm.
X Press reset button J again. X Press the æ or ç button to select a
Settings menu The functions of most submenus are submenu.
restored to the factory settings.
In the Settings menu, you can use the To The selected submenu is highlighted.
reset: Press reset button for 3 sec- or X Press the j button to select a function
onds function to restore most settings to the X If you want to retain the settings, do not within a submenu.
factory settings. There are also submenus in press reset buttonJ a second time.
which you can make individual settings for X Press the æ or ç button to change
You will see the Settings menu again after
your vehicle. the setting.
approximately 5 seconds.
The changed setting is stored.
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94). X Press the è or · button to select a
different menu. X Press the è or ÿ button to select a
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
different display.
ing wheel.
The following tables show the settings you Z
can make in the individual submenus. You will

101
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 102
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
find additional information on the pages Vehicle submenu
Rcruise control
shown. RSpeedtronic
RPermanent Speedtronic (Y page 114)
Instrument cluster submenu Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the ana-
RAutomatic locking feature (Y page 105) logue speedometer and the digital speedom-
RUnit of measurement for distance eter always show different units.
(Y page 102)
X Press the è or · button to select the
RLanguage (Y page 102) Convenience submenu*
Settings menu.
RStatus line display (Y page 103) REasy-entry/exit feature * (Y page 106) X Press the j button to call up the selec-
RFold in the exterior mirrors when locking tion of submenus.
Time/date submenu13 the vehicle* (Y page 106) X Press the æ or ç button to select the
Instr. cluster submenu.
RTime and date (Y page 103) X Press the j button to select Display
Selecting the unit of measurement for unit Speed-/odometer.
Lighting submenu distance X Press æ or ç to select km (kilome-
The selected unit of measurement for dis- tres) or miles as the unit of measurement
RConstant headlamp mode (Y page 104) tance applies to: for distance.
RSurround lighting (Y page 104) Rthe analogue speedometer (only vehicles X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off with speedometers in km/h) select a different display.
(Y page 105) Rthe digital speedometer (not for vehicles
RInterior lighting delayed switch-off for the United Kingdom with speedometers Selecting the language
(Y page 105) in mph)
X Press the è or · button to select the
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip Settings menu.
meter
X Press the j button to call up the selec-
Rthe trip computer tion of submenus.
13 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS*, Audio 55 APS* or COMAND APS*.

* optional
102
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 103
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
X Press the æ or ç button to select the X Press the è or · button to select the X You can see which audio system* is fitted
Instr. cluster submenu. Settings menu. in your vehicle by referring to the separate
Press the j button to call up the selec- operating instructions.
X Press the j button to select Lan- X
guage. tion of submenus. Depending on the audio system* fitted, time
Press the æ or ç button to select the and date are received from GPS satellites and
X Press the æ or ç button to select a X
therefore cannot be set using the on-board
language: Instr. cluster submenu.
computer; see the following table.
RDeutsch X Press j to select the Select dis-
A B C
REnglish play option.
RFrançais X Press æ or ç to select the display in Set using on-board computer X
RItaliano the status bar: outside temperature (Out-
side temp.) or speed (Speed). Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X
REspañol tion
The selected display now appears continu-
RNederlands ously in the multi-function display. You will
RDansk see the display you have not selected when X Press the è or · button to select the
you scroll through the Standard display Settings menu.
RSvenska
menu (Y page 95).
RPortuguês X Press the j button to call up the selec-
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to tion of submenus.
RTürkçe select a different display.
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to Time/Date submenu.
select a different display. Setting the date and time
Your vehicle could have the following audio
Selecting the status line display equipment*:
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func- A: Audio 20* or Audio 25*
tion is not available. B: Audio 50 APS* or Audio 55 APS*
C: COMAND APS*

* optional
103
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 104
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
Setting the time Turning the light switch to a different position Switching the surround lighting on or
X Use the j button to select Clock, switches on the corresponding lights. off
hours Press R to confirm (or Clock, In countries in which constant headlamp If the surround lighting is switched on, the
minutes Press R to confirm). mode is a legal requirement, Constant is the following lights will be switched on automat-
factory setting. ically in the dark after you have unlocked the
X Press the æ or ç button to set a
X Press the è or · button to select the vehicle using the key:
value.
Settings menu. Rthe side lamps
X Press the reset button J on the left of the
instrument cluster. X Press the j button to call up the selec- Rthe tail lamps
The set time is stored. tion of submenus.
Rthe licence plate lighting
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
Rthe front foglamps
Setting the date Lighting submenu.
X Press the j button to select Set date The surround lighting switches off automati-
X Press the j button to select Headlamp cally if you open the driver's door or after 40
Day (or Set date Month or Set date mode. seconds.
Year). X Press the æ or ç button to set the X Press the è or · button to select the
X Press the æ or ç button to set the switch-on mode for the headlamps to Man- Settings menu.
values. ual or Constant (constant headlamp
X Press the j button to call up the selec-
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to mode).
tion of submenus.
select a different display. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
select a different display.
Lighting submenu.
Setting constant headlamp mode
X Press the j button to select the Sur-
If you have selected constant headlamp mode round lighting function.
and the light switch is set to the M or
U position, the side lamps, dipped-beam
headlamps and licence plate lighting switch
on automatically when the engine is running.

104
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 105
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
X Press the æ or ç button to switch X Press the è or · button to select the Activating or deactivating the interior
the Surround lighting function on or Settings menu. lighting delayed switch-off
off. Press the j button to call up the selec-
X The Interior lighting delayed switch-
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to tion of submenus. off function allows you to set whether the
select a different display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the interior lighting should remain on for 10 sec-
Lighting submenu. onds after the key is removed from the igni-
Activating or deactivating the exterior tion lock when it is dark.
X Press the j button to select Headlamps X Press the è or · button to select the
lighting delayed switch-off
delayed switch-off.
Settings menu.
You can set whether the exterior lighting X Press the æ or ç button to activate
should remain on when it is dark for 15 sec- X Press the j button to call up the selec-
or deactivate the Headlamps delayed tion of submenus.
onds after the doors are closed using the
switch-off function.
Headlamp switch-off delay function. If X Press the æ or ç button to select the
none of the doors are opened after the engine X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
Lighting submenu.
is switched off or if an open door is not closed, select a different display.
the exterior lighting goes out after 60 sec- X Press the j button to select Interior
To temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-
onds. lighting delayed switch-off.
off:
When you have set a delayed switch-off time X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
X Press the æ or ç button to activate
and then switch off the engine, the following position 0 in the ignition lock. or deactivate Interior lighting
remain lit: delayed switch-off.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Rthe side lamps X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
lock and back to position 0.
Rthe tail lamps Delayed switch-off is deactivated. select a different display.
Rthe licence plate lighting When you switch on the ignition, the interior
Rthe front foglamps lighting delayed switch-off is reactivated. Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking feature
The Automatic door locking feature
allows you to set whether your vehicle will Z

105
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 106
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
lock centrally from a speed of about G Risk of injury Activating or deactivating the fold-in
15 km/h upwards. When the easy-entry/exit feature is active, mirrors when locking* function
i For more information on automatic lock- the steering wheel moves. There is a risk of The Fold in mirrors when locking func-
ing, see (Y page 57). occupants becoming trapped. Before acti- tion allows you to determine whether the
vating the easy-entry/exit feature, make exterior mirrors should fold in when you lock
X Press the è or · button to select the sure that nobody can become trapped. the vehicle. When you open a door or switch
Settings menu. Do not leave children unsupervised in the on the ignition, the exterior mirrors fold out
X Press the j button to call up the selec- vehicle, even if they are secured in a child again.
tion of submenus. restraint system. The children could open If you have switched the function on and you
the driver's door and thereby unintention- fold in the exterior mirrors using the button
X Press the æ or ç button to select the
ally activate the easy-entry/exit feature on the centre console (Y page 66), they will
Vehicle submenu. and become trapped. not fold out automatically. The exterior mir-
X Press the j button to select Automatic rors can then only be folded out using the
door locking. X Press the è or · button to select the button on the centre console.
Settings menu.
X Press the æ or ç button to switch X Press the è or · button to select the
the Automatic door locking feature on X Press the j button to call up the selec- Settings menu.
or off. tion of submenus.
X Press the j button to call up the selec-
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to X Press æ or ç to select the Conve- tion of submenus.
select a different display. nience submenu. X Press the æ or ç button to select the
X Press the j button to select the EASY- Convenience submenu.
Activating or deactivating the easy- ENTRY system. X Press the j button to select Fold in
entry/exit feature* X Press the æ or ç button to activate mirrors when locking.
i For more information on the easy-entry/ or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system.
exit feature, see (Y page 65). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
select a different display.

* optional
106
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 107
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
X Press the æ or ç button to activate
or deactivate the Fold in mirrors when
locking feature.
X Press the j, è or ÿ button to
select a different display.

1 Time 1 Kilometres
Trip computer menu 2 Average fuel consumption 2 Time
You can use the Trip computer menu to call 3 Average speed 3 Average fuel consumption
up or reset statistical data for your vehicle. 4 Kilometres 4 Average speed
i You can select km or miles as the unit of If the vehicle is parked for more than 4 hours,
measurement for distance (Y page 102). the From start Resetting the consumption statistics
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94). consumption statistics are reset (key in posi- X Press the j or k button to select the
tion 0 of the ignition lock or removed). function that you wish to reset.
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
The values will not be reset if you turn the key
ing wheel. X Press and hold reset button Jon the left
to position 1 or 2 during this time.
X Press è or · to select After of the instrument cluster until the values
start. are reset to "0".
Consumption statistics from the last
reset The consumption statistics After reset are
Consumption statistics from start reset automatically after 9,999 hours or
The values refer to the last reset of the func- 99,999 kilometres.
The values refer to the start of the journey. tion.
X Press j or k to select From Calling up the range
reset.
X Press j or k to select Range:.
The multi-function display shows the esti-
mated distance that can be covered by the Z
vehicle, based on your current driving style

107
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 108
vpfaff7,

Controls

On-board computer
and the amount of fuel remaining in the Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- Accepting a call
tank. ing wheel.
If someone calls you while you are in the Tel-
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys-
ephone menu, the following message
the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle tem* or COMAND APS* see the separate appears in the multi-function display:
being refuelled instead of the range. operating instructions.
X Press the è or · button to select the
Telephone menu.
Telephone menu*
Functions and displays are dependent on the
Mobile phone on
optional equipment installed in your vehicle.
You can place your mobile phone in the PIN code not yet entered
mobile phone cradle* (Y page 141), or set up Example
Once you have inserted the mobile phone into
a Bluetooth connection to the audio sys- the mobile phone cradle* the multi-function X Press the s button to accept the call.
tem* or COMAND APS* see the separate display shows the Please enter PIN:mes-
operating instructions. sage.
Rejecting or ending a call
G Risk of accident X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Lin-
Observe the legal requirements of the guatronic*, the audio system*or COMAND X Press the t button.
country in which you are currently driving APS*.
regarding the use of mobile telephones in The mobile phone will search for a network. Dialling a number from the phone book
the vehicle.
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while If your mobile phone is operational, you can
Mobile phone operational
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use select and dial a number from the phone book
The multi-function display shows the Ready at any time. It is only possible to enter new
them when the road and traffic conditions message or the name of the GSM network
permit. You may otherwise be distracted numbers into the phone book using the
provider. If the operational readiness symbol mobile phone. Please refer to the separate
from the traffic conditions, cause an acci- goes out, your vehicle is outside the trans-
dent and injure yourself and others. operating instructions for notes on how to do
mission and reception range. this.
i Menu overview: see (Y page 94).

* optional
108
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 109
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
X Press the j or k button to call up X Press the s button to call up the most Driving systems
the phone book. recently dialled number in the redial mem-
Your vehicle's driving systems are described
X Press the j or k button to select the ory.
on the following pages:
desired name. To scroll through the tele- X Press the j or k button to select the
RCruise control and Speedtronic, which you
phone book faster, press and hold the desired name or number.
can use to control the speed of the vehicle
j or k button for longer than 1 sec- X Press the s button to start dialling. RParktronic*,
which assists you in parking
ond.
and manoeuvring
X Press the s button to start dialling.
The DIALLING message appears in the The ABS, BAS and ESP® driving safety sys-
multi-function display. tems are described in the "Driving safety sys-
tems" section (Y page 50).
The number dialled is stored in the redial
memory.
When there is a connection, the call dura- Cruise control
tion appears in the multi-function display.
Cruise control maintains a constant road
The name also appears, provided it is
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
stored in the phone book, otherwise the
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
dialled number is still displayed.
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
or vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
X If you do not wish to make a call, press the in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in
t button. vehicles with automatic transmission*. In this
way you will make use of the braking effect of
Redialling the engine, which relieves the load on the
brake system and prevents the brakes from
The on-board computer stores the last phone overheating and wearing too quickly.
numbers which were dialled.

* optional
109
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 110
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
G Risk of accident roads). You could otherwise cause an
Do not change down for additional engine accident.
braking on a slippery road surface. This Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerat-
could cause the drive wheels to lose their ing could cause the drive wheels to lose
grip and the vehicle could skid. traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a fog, heavy rain or snow
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h.
G Risk of accident Cruise control lever
1 To store the current speed or a higher
Cruise control cannot take account of road You can operate cruise control and variable speed
and traffic conditions. Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. 2 LIM indicator lamp
Always pay attention to traffic conditions The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control 3 To resume the last speed stored
even when cruise control is activated. lever indicates which system you have selec-
4 To store the current speed or a lower
Cruise control is only an aid designed to ted:
speed
assist driving. You are responsible for the RLIM indicator lamp off: 5 To switch between cruise control and var-
vehicle's speed and for braking in good cruise control is selected iable Speedtronic
time.
RLIM indicator lamp lit: 6 To deactivate cruise control
G Risk of accident variable Speedtronic is selected
Do not use cruise control: Selecting cruise control
Rin road and traffic conditions which do
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off.
not allow you to maintain a constant
speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
the direction of arrow 5.
LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

110
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 111
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
G Risk of injury When selecting another gear, press the Setting a speed
Cruise control brakes automatically in accelerator pedal slightly to increase the
X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a
order to avoid exceeding the set speed. As smoothness of the gear change.
higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed.
it does so, the brake pedal is depressed. Do When you depress the clutch pedal and
not place your foot under the brake pedal change to another gear, the engine speed X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
as it could become trapped. can increase slightly as long as no gear is the desired speed is reached.
selected. X Release the cruise control lever.
RAlways drive at adequate but not exces- The new speed is stored.
Storing and maintaining the current sive engine speeds.
speed i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
RChange gear in good time.
You can store the current speed if you are depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
RIf possible, do not change down several
driving faster than 30 km/h. ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
gears at a time. cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
speed.
ished overtaking.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up Resuming the last speed stored
1 or down 4. G Risk of accident i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of
Remove your foot from the accelerator the cruise control lever is assisted by auto-
X Only select a stored speed if you know what
pedal. matic application of the brakes.
that speed is and whether it is suitable for
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle the current situation. Otherwise, sudden Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
automatically maintains the stored speed. acceleration or braking could endanger you On long downhill gradients, the automatic
or others. transmission shifts down as a further meas-
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain ure.
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
stored speed is resumed when the gradient you 3.
evens out. Cruise control maintains the X Remove your foot from the accelerator
stored speed on downhill gradients by pedal.
automatically applying the brakes.
Cruise control is activated and adjusts the
Vehicles with manual transmission: vehicle's speed to the last speed stored.

111
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 112
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h RESP® is intervening or you deactivate G Risk of accident
increments ESP® Never depress the brake pedal continu-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up Ryou depress the clutch pedal for more than ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.
1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a seven seconds on vehicles with a manual never cause the brakes to rub by applying
lower speed. transmission constant slight pedal pressure. This causes
The last speed stored is increased or Ryou move the selector lever to N in vehicles
the brake system to overheat, increases
reduced. the braking distance and can lead to the
with automatic transmission* while driving brakes failing completely.

Deactivating cruise control i The last speed stored is cleared when you G Risk of accident
switch off the engine.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise Do not change down for additional engine
control: braking on a slippery road surface. This
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- Speedtronic
grip and the vehicle could skid.
wards 6. Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you
do not exceed the set speed. On long and You can set a variable or permanent limit
or
steep downhill gradients, especially if the speed:
X Brake.
vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear RVariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
or in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in areas(Y page 113)
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the vehicles with automatic transmission*. In this RPermanent for long-term speed restric-
direction of arrow 5. way you will make use of the braking effect of tions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres
Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi- the engine, which relieves the load on the (Y page 114)
cator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever brake system and prevents the brakes from
lights up. overheating and wearing too quickly. If you G Risk of accident
need additional braking, depress the brake Speedtronic is only an aid designed to
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if, pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. assist driving. You are responsible for the
for example:
vehicle's speed and for braking in good
Ryou apply the handbrake time.
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h

* optional
112
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 113
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
i The speed indicated in the speedometer If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
may differ slightly from the limit speed the direction of arrow 5.
stored. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control
lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is
Variable Speedtronic selected.

You can operate cruise control and variable G Risk of accident

Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. If there is a change of drivers, advise the
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control new driver of the limit speed stored.
lever indicates which system you have selec- Only use Speedtronic if you will not have to
ted: accelerate suddenly to a speed above that
1 To store the current speed or a higher
RLIM indicator lamp off: stored as the limit speed. You could other-
speed
wise cause an accident.
cruise control is selected 2 LIM indicator lamp
You can only exceed the limit speed stored
RLIM indicator lamp lit: 3 To resume the last stored speed or to if you deactivate variable Speedtronic:
variable Speedtronic is selected make fine adjustments in 1 km/h incre-
Rusing the cruise control lever
ments
You can use the cruise control lever to limit Rby
4 To store the current speed or a lower depressing the accelerator pedal
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
speed beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
the engine is running.
5 To switch between cruise control and var- It is not possible to deactivate variable
iable Speedtronic Speedtronic by braking.
6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic
G Risk of injury
Variable Speedtronic brakes automatically
Selecting variable Speedtronic
in order to avoid exceeding the set speed.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is on. As it does so, the brake pedal is depressed.
If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already Do not place your foot under the brake
selected. pedal as it could become trapped.

113
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 114
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
Storing the current speed Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h more than 20 km/h from the stored speed.
increments You will hear a warning tone if this is the case.
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise G Risk of accident
the engine is running. control lever towards you 3. It is not possible to deactivate variable
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up or Speedtronic by braking.
1 or down 4. X Keep the cruise control lever pulled
The current speed is stored. You will see i The last speed stored is cleared when you
towards you 3 until the desired speed is
the stored speed in the multi-function dis- switch off the engine.
set.
play.
Permanent Speedtronic
Deactivating variable Speedtronic
Resuming the last speed stored You can use the on-board computer to limit
There are several ways to deactivate variable
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards the speed permanently to a value between
X Speedtronic:
you 3. 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres)
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- and the maximum speed.
wards 6. Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it
Adjustment in 10 km/h increments or is shown in the multi-function display.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a direction of arrow 5. even if you depress the accelerator pedal
lower speed. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
or lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is Setting permanent Speedtronic
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until deactivated.
X Press the è or · button to select the
the desired speed is set. Press the cruise Cruise control is selected.
Settings menu (Y page 101).
control lever, up 1 for a higher speed or Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automat-
down 4 for a lower speed. X Press the j button to call up the selec-
ically when you depress the accelerator pedal
tion of submenus.
beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but
only if your current speed does not differ by

114
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 115
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
X Press the æ or ç button to select the Parktronic*
Vehicle submenu.
G Risk of accident
X Press the j button to select Speed
Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect
limit (winter tyres).
all obstacles. It does not relieve you of the
responsibility to pay attention.
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
immediate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endan-
ger yourself and others. 1 Sensors in the front bumper
G Risk of injury
X Press the æ orç button to select the
Make sure that no persons or animals are Range of the sensors
desired setting.
in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
The following settings can be selected: The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
could be injured.
ROff slush, otherwise they may not function cor-
Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It indi- rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. care not to scratch or damage them.
cates visually and audibly the distance
RA limit speed between 240 km/h and between your vehicle and an object.
160 km/h by increments of 10 km/h Parktronic is automatically activated when
X To select a different display, press the you switch on the ignition and release the
j, è or ÿ button. handbrake.
Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above
18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
Parktronic monitors the area around your
Side view
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.

* optional
115
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 116
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic
to malfunction.

Minimum distance
Centre Approximately 20 cm

Top view Corners Approximately 15 cm Front area warning display

1 Left-hand side of the vehicle
Front sensors If there is an obstacle within this range, all 2 Right-hand side of the vehicle
Centre Approximately 100 cm warning displays light up and a tone sounds. 3 Indicator segments
If the distance falls below the minimum clear-
ance, it may no longer be shown. The warning display for each side of the vehi-
Corners Approximately 60 cm
cle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. Parktronic is operational if yellow
Warning displays indicator segments 3 light up.
Rear sensors
The warning displays show the distance The gear lever or selector lever position*
Centre Approximately 120 cm between the sensors and the obstacle. The determines which warning display is active:
warning display for the front area is located
Corners Approximately 80 cm on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted between the roll-over bars.
! Pay particular attention to objects above
or below the sensors when parking, such
as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic
does not detect such objects when they are

* optional
116
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 117
vpfaff7,

Controls

Driving systems
Manual transmission: ing tone for a maximum of two seconds. If indicator lamp 2 is on, Parktronic is deac-
You have reached the minimum distance. tivated.
Gear lever in Warning display
RRear area: from the first segment onwards, i Parktronic is automatically activated
Forwards gear Front area activated you will hear an intermittent warning tone. when you turn the key to position 2 in the
or The interval gets shorter after each seg- ignition lock.
Neutral ment. From the seventh segment you will
hear a continuous warning tone. You have
Reverse gear Rear and front areas reached the minimum distance. The per-
activated manent warning tone immediately stops
when you disengage the reverse gear in
vehicles with manual transmission or set
Automatic transmission*: the automatic transmission* to transmis-
Selector lever at Warning display sion range D or P.

D Front area activated

Deactivating/activating Parktronic
R or N Rear and front areas
activated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
RFront area: from the sixth segment
onwards, you will hear an intermittent
warning tone; from the seventh segment
1 To deactivate/activate Parktronic
onwards, you will hear a continuous warn-
2 Indicator lamp

* optional
117
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 118
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning systems

The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems:

Heatmatic 2-zone Thermatic* Thermotronic *

Heatmatic is a heating and ventilation system 2-zone Thermatic combines a heating and The Thermotronic automatic air-conditioning
without a cooling system. ventilation system with a cooling system. system combines an automatic heating and
ventilation system with a cooling system. You
i The design of the control panel and the i The design of the control and the func-
can control the air conditioning separately for
functions of Heatmatic are identical to that tions of 2-zone Thermatic are identical to
the driver's and front-passenger sides.
of 2-zone Thermatic. that of Heatmatic.
Exception: 2-zone Thermatic has the addi- Exception: 2-zone Thermatic has the addi-
tional "A/C" function 9. tional "A/C" function 9.

* optional
118
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 119
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
General notes i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period specified in the Service Booklet. As it
during warm weather. This will speed up the depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
2-zone Thermatic*/Thermotronic* controls cooling process and the desired interior heavy air pollution, the interval may be
the temperature and the humidity of the vehi- temperature will be reached more quickly. shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
cle interior and filters out undesirable sub-
stances from the air. i The integrated filter filters out most par- G Risk of accident
Heatmatic/2-zone Thermatic*/ ticles of dust and completely filters out Observe the settings recommended on the
Thermotronic* is only operational when the pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount following pages. The windows could other-
engine is running. Optimum operation is only of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For wise mist up. This may obstruct your view
achieved when you drive with the side win- this reason, you should always observe the of the traffic situation, thereby causing an
dows closed. interval for replacing the filter, which is accident.

* optional
119
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 120
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning functions

Heatmatic

Function Recommendation/Notes

1 Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

2 Q Sets the airflow (Y page 129)

Q Activates/deactivates Heatmatic (Y page 126)

120
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 121
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Function Recommendation/Notes

3 Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)

4 Sets the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

5 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 130)
only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed
up.

6 y Activates/deactivates the demisting function for i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 130)
the windscreen screen is clear again.

7 T Activates/deactivates the auxiliary heating/venti- i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 132)
lation vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.

8 , Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 131)
a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to
lack of fresh air.

121
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 122
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
2-zone Thermatic*

Function Recommendation/Notes

1 Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

2 Q Sets the airflow (Y page 129)

Q Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Activate Thermatic. (Y page 126)

3 Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)

4 Sets the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

* optional
122
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 123
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Function Recommendation/Notes

5 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 130)
only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed
up.

6 y Activates/deactivates the demisting function for i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 130)
the windscreen screen is clear again.

7 9 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidifi- i Switch on the air conditioning with air dehumidifica- (Y page 126)
cation tion function. The indicator lamp in the 9 button
lights up.

9 Activates/deactivates the auxiliary heating/venti- i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 132)
lation vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.

8 , Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 131)
a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to
lack of fresh air.

123
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 124
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Thermotronic *

Function Recommendation/Notes

1 Q Sets the airflow (Y page 129)

2 U Controls the air conditioning automatically i Activate automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 127)
lamp in the U button comes on.

3 y Activates/deactivates the demisting function for i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 130)
the windscreen screen is clear again.

* optional
124
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 125
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Function Recommendation/Notes

4 $ Increases the temperature, left-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

5 ´ Activates/deactivates Thermotronic i Activate Thermotronic. The indicator lamp in the (Y page 126)
´ button goes out.

6 $ Increases the temperature, right-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

7 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 130)
only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed
up.

8 Sets the air distribution (Y page 129)

9 T Activates/deactivates the auxiliary heating/venti- i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 132)
lation vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition.

a œ Switches air-conditioning with air dehumidification i Switch on the air conditioning with air dehumidifica- (Y page 126)
on/off tion function. The indicator lamp in the œ button
comes on.

b % Reduces the temperature, right-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

c Display

125
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 126
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Function Recommendation/Notes

d % Reduces the temperature, left-hand side i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 127)

e , Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 131)
a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to
lack of fresh air.

Switching the air conditioning on/off X To activate Thermotronic*: press the Switching cooling with air-dehumidi-
´ button. fication on/off
i When the air conditioning is switched off,
The indicator lamp in the ´ button goes The "cooling with dehumidification" function
the air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. Only select this setting briefly, out. The previously selected settings come is only available when the engine is running.
otherwise the windows may mist up. into effect again. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
or midified according to the temperature selec-
X To activate Heatmatic/2-zone ted. This prevents the windows from misting
X Press the U button.
Thermatic*: turn thumbwheel 2 clock- up.
wise to the desired position (apart from the The indicator lamp in the U button
comes on. Airflow and air distribution are G Risk of accident
0 position) (Y page 120), (Y page 122).
set to automatic mode. If the "cooling with air-dehumidification"
X To deactivate Heatmatic/2-zone function is deactivated, the air inside the
Thermatic*: turn thumbwheel 2 anti- X To switch off Thermotronic*: press the
vehicle will not be cooled (during warm
clockwise to position 0 (Y page 120), ´ button.
weather) or dehumidified. The windows
(Y page 122). The indicator lamp in the ´ button could mist up more quickly. This may pre-
comes on. vent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions, thereby causing an accident.

* optional
126
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 127
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
H Environmental note Controlling the air conditioning auto- Setting the temperature
The cooling system uses the refrigerant matically
Different temperatures can be set for the
R134A. This refrigerant does not damage Only Thermotronic* features the "control air driver's and front-passenger sides.
the earth's ozone layer. conditioning automatically" function.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is Heatmatic/2-zone Thermatic*
i Condensation may drip from the under- maintained at a constant level fully automat-
side of the vehicle when Thermatic is in X To increase/reduce: turn thumb-
ically. To do so, the system automatically
cooling mode. wheels 1 and 4 clockwise or anti-clock-
regulates the temperature of the dispensed
wise (Y page 120), (Y page 122). Only
The "cooling with air dehumidification" func- air, the airflow and the air distribution.
adjust the temperature in small incre-
tion is only available with 2-zone Thermatic* The automatic air conditioning will achieve ments. Start at 22 †.
or Thermotronic*. optimal operation if "cooling with air dehu-
X To activate: press the 914/œ15 but- midification" is also activated. If necessary,
cooling with air dehumidification can be deac- Thermotronic *
ton.
tivated. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or
The indicator lamp in the 9/œ but-
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in % button. Only change the temperature
ton lights up.
the ignition lock. setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
X To deactivate: press the 914/œ 15
X Set the desired temperature. The temperature is shown in the display.
button.
The indicator lamp in the 9/œ but- X To activate: press the U button.
ton goes out. The cooling with air dehumid- The indicator lamp in the U button
ification has a delayed switch-off feature. comes on.
X To deactivate: press the U button.
The indicator lamp in the U button goes
out. The airflow is set to level 2. The air dis-
tribution is set to position b.

14 Vehicles with 2-zone Thermatic*.

15 Vehicles with Thermotronic*.

* optional
127
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 128
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Adjusting the air vents Setting the centre air vents locking point or beyond the first locking
point to the stop.
G Risk of injury X To close the swivelling centre air vents:
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the turn thumbwheels 2 and 5 down.
air vents. This could cause burns or frost-
bite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity
of the vents. Keep bare skin away from Setting the side air vents
these air outlets. If necessary, direct the
airflow away to a different area of the vehi-
cle interior.
Please observe the following notes to ensure
that the air can flow freely through the air
Centre air vents
vents:
1 Fixed centre air vent, left
RKeep the air inlet between the windscreen
2 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left
and the bonnet free of deposits, such as ice
and snow, to guarantee the supply of fresh 3 Swivelling centre air vent, left
air into the vehicle interior. 4 Swivelling centre air vent, right
RNever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet 5 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right Side air vents
grilles in the vehicle interior. 6 Fixed centre air vent, right 1 Side window demister vent
2 Side air vent
i Position the sliders for the centre air X To open the fixed centre air vents: turn
thumbwheels 2 and 5 up to the first 3 Side air vent thumbwheel
vents in the central position to provide vir-
tually draught-free ventilation. locking point. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 to the
X To close the fixed centre air vents: turn left or right.
thumbwheels 2 and 5 down or up
beyond the first locking point.
X To open the swivelling centre air vents:
turn thumbwheels 2 and 5 up to the first

128
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 129
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Setting the AIRSCARF* vents Setting the air distribution Thermotronic *
G Risk of injury The symbols for the air distribution have the X Turn thumbwheel 8 to the corresponding
When AIRSCARF is in operation, very hot air following meanings: symbol (Y page 124). The thumbwheel can
can flow from the vents in the head also be turned to the area between two
Symbol Meaning
restraints. This could cause burns to bare symbols.
skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Z Directs the airflow through the
Make sure that you reduce the heater out- demister vents to the wind-
put in time. screen and side windows Setting the airflow

b Directs the airflow to the entire Heatmatic/2-zone Thermatic*

vehicle interior
X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel
Y Directs the airflow to the foot- 2 clockwise or anti-clockwise
well and through the side air (Y page 120), (Y page 122).
vents
a Directs the airflow through the Thermotronic *
centre and side air vents X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel
1 clockwise or anti-clockwise
(Y page 124).
1 AIRSCARF vent Heatmatic/2-zone Thermatic*
You can adjust the blower output of the AIR- X Turn thumbwheel 3 to the corresponding
SCARF vents using the AIRSCARF button symbol (Y page 120), (Y page 122). The
(Y page 62). thumbwheel can also be turned to the area
between two symbols.

* optional
129
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 130
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
Demisting the windscreen midification16 function remains on. Air- Windows misted up on the outside
recirculation mode remains deactivated.
i You should only select the "demisting" X Activate the windscreen wipers.
function until the windscreen is clear again. or X Turn the air distribution thumbwheel to the
X Press the U button.18 Y or a symbol.
X To activate: press the y button.
The indicator lamp in the y button goes
The indicator lamp in the y button out. Airflow and air distribution are set to i You should only select this setting until
comes on. automatic mode. the windscreen is clear again.
The system automatically switches to the
following functions:
Demisting the windows Switching the rear window heating
Rcooling with air dehumidification on 16
on/off
Rhigh airflow17
Windows misted up on the inside G Risk of accident
Rhigh temperature17
X Activate the "cooling with air-dehumidifica- Clear all windows of ice or snow before set-
Rair distribution to the windscreen and ting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise
tion" function.19
front side windows endanger yourself and others.
X Activate the automatic air conditioning.20
Rair-recirculation mode off
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate i At very low temperatures, the rear win-
X To deactivate: press the y button. the "demisting" function. dow heating is only switched on once the
The indicator lamp in the y button goes vehicle interior has warmed up.
out. The previously selected settings come
into effect again. The cooling with air dehu- i The rear window heating has a high cur-
rent draw. You should therefore switch it
off as soon as the window is clear, as it only

16 Vehicles with 2-zone Thermatic*/Thermotronic*.

17 Depending on the outside temperature.
18 Vehicles with Thermotronic*.
19 Vehicles with 2-zone Thermatic*/Thermotronic*.
20 Vehicles with Thermotronic*.

* optional
130
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 131
vpfaff7,

Controls

Air conditioning
switches itself off automatically after X To activate: press the , button. Air-recirculation mode with the conve-
between six and seventeen minutes. The indicator lamp in the , button nience opening/closing feature
comes on. G Risk of injury
i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window heating may switch off. i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto- Make sure that nobody can become trap-
matically at high outside temperatures. ped between the side window and the door
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in frame as the side windows are opened and
the ignition lock. When air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically, the indicator lamp in closed. Do not place objects or lean against
X Press the ¯ button. the , button is not lit. the side window when it is being opened or
The indicator lamp in the ¯ switch lights closed. You or the objects could be drawn
Outside air is added after about 30
up or goes out. in or become trapped between the side
minutes.
window and the door frame as the window
X To deactivate: press the , button. moves. If there is a risk of entrapment,
Activating/deactivating air-recircula- press the , button again. If necessary,
The indicator lamp in the , button goes
tion mode press the switch that stops, opens or closes
out.
the side window in the opposite direction.
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-
matically:
X Convenience closing: press and hold
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- the , button until the side windows
cle will then be recirculated. Rafter approximately five minutes at out- have closed.
G Risk of accident side temperatures below approximately
The indicator lamp in the , button
5†
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activa-
briefly at low outside temperatures. Other- Rafter approximately 5 minutes if the cool-
ted.
wise, the windows could mist up, thus ing with air dehumidification function21
impairing visibility and endangering your- is switched off X Convenience opening: press and hold
self and others. This may prevent you from the , button until the side windows
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
observing the traffic conditions, thereby have returned to their original position.
side temperatures above approximately
causing an accident. 5† The indicator lamp in the , button goes
out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
21 Vehicles with 2-zone Thermatic*/Thermotronic*.

* optional
131
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 132
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening/closing the roof

i If you open the side windows manually X Make sure that the key is in position 0 in Opening/closing the roof
after closing using the convenience closing the ignition lock or that it has been
feature, it will remain in this position when removed. For safety reasons, the roof can only be
opened using the convenience opening fea- X To switch on: press the T22/923 opened and closed when the vehicle is sta-
ture. tionary.
button.
The indicator lamp in the T/9 but- G Risk of accident and injury
Switching the residual heat/auxiliary ton lights up. Always open or close the roof fully before
ventilation on/off driving.
X To deactivate: press the T22/9 23 If the roof does not open or close fully, the
It is possible to make use of the residual heat button. roof hydraulic system is depressurised and
of the engine to continue heating the station- The indicator lamp in the T/9 but- the roof lowers itself
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the ton goes out. Rafter about seven minutes if the ignition
engine has been switched off. The heating
time depends on the set interior temperature. is switched on
i The auxiliary heating/ventilation is auto-
Rafter about 15 seconds if the ignition is
i The blower will run at a low speed regard- matically deactivated after about 30
minutes, or when: switched off
less of the airflow setting.
Rthe ignition is switched on A warning tone sounds shortly beforehand.
i If you activate the "residual heat" function The message Vario-roof lowering
Rthe battery voltage drops
at high temperatures, only the ventilation appears in the multi-function display.
will be activated. The blower runs at Lock the roof again before driving on. Oth-
medium speed. erwise the unlocked roof could open during
the journey and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle. You or other persons could
be injured as a result.

! Never sit on the rear shelf and never store

heavy objects there. You will otherwise
22 Vehicles with Heatmatic/Thermotronic*.
23 Vehicles with Thermatic*.

* optional
132
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 133
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening/closing the roof

damage the roof and the rear shelf of your Using the roof switch Opening
vehicle.
G Risk of injury i Make sure that the roof and rear window
! When opening and closing the roof, make When opening or closing the roof, make are dry before opening the roof. Otherwise,
sure that: sure that nobody is trapped or injured by water could enter the interior or boot.
Rthere is sufficient upward clearance, as moving parts such as the boot lid, the X Apply the handbrake (Y page 83).
the roof swings upwards hinged roof or the roof linkage.
X Make sure that the boot separator is closed
Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the If danger threatens, release the roof switch
(Y page 134).
vehicle as the boot lid swings backwards immediately. The roof folding mechanism
beyond the bumper stops immediately. X Close the boot lid.
Rthe boot is only loaded to below the boot
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
The switch is on the lower section of the
separator centre console. the ignition lock.
Rthe boot separator is not pushed up by
X Pull the roof switch in the direction of arrow
the load 2 until the roof is stored fully in the boot.
Rthe boot separator is closed
Closing
Rthe boot lid is closed
Rno
X Apply the handbrake (Y page 83).
roof rack is fitted
Rthe
X Make sure that the boot separator is closed
outside temperature is above -15°C
(Y page 134).
Rthe roof is not dirty or wet
X Close the boot lid.
You will otherwise damage the roof and the
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
boot of your vehicle.
1 To close the roof the ignition lock.
2 To open the roof X Push the roof switch in the direction of
arrow 1 until the roof is closed fully.

133
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 134
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening/closing the roof

With the key Opening Before driving on

G Risk of injury X Point the tip of the key at the door handle. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Press and hold the k button until the the ignition lock.
When opening or closing the roof, make X
sure that nobody is trapped or injured by roof is fully opened. X Push the roof switch forwards.
moving parts such as the boot lid, the All side windows open.
hinged roof or the roof linkage. While driving
If danger threatens, immediately release To close
the k or j button on the key. The X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
roof folding mechanism stops immediately. X Point the tip of the key at the door handle. tion to road and traffic conditions.
X Press and hold the j button until the X Push the roof switch forwards.
roof is fully closed.
The roof and side windows close.
Boot separator
The boot separator can be used to cover lug-
Locking the roof again gage and loads in the boot.
The roof is unlocked when: ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage
Rthe Vario-roof in operation message when folding back the roof, you should:
appears in the multi-function display Ronly load the boot to below the boot sep-

Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten sec- arator

Using the key to open and close the roof onds when pulling away or while driving Rnot place any objects on or in front of the

You can lock the roof again if it is not locked boot separator
fully. Rnot place any objects on the cover
behind the roll-over bars
Rnot allow the load to push up the boot
separator

134
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 135
vpfaff7,

Controls

Opening/closing the roof

X Pull the boot separator up out of the eyelets Fitting
on the luggage compartment lip.
X Push the boot separator forwards by the
handle in the opposite direction of the
arrow.

Draught stop*
The draught stop is a wind protection device
for driving with the soft top open.
Closing the boot separator Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a dif-
ferent draught stop may be provided. In this 1 Draught stop
Closing the boot separator case you should read the assembly instruc- 2 Press-studs
tions provided with the draught stop.
X Pull the boot separator backwards in the 3 Retainer loop
direction of the arrow by its handle until it G Risk of accident 4 Securing pin
engages in the luggage compartment lip on Dismantle the draught stop if your vision is 5 Gap
both sides. restricted or as soon as it is dark. It could
otherwise impair your rear view. You could X Hook retainer loops 3 to securing pins
cause an accident because of this. 4.
Opening the boot separator
X Reach into the handle of the boot separa- i Make sure the lower edge of the draught
tor. stop is routed through gap 5 between the
X Press the release button in the handle of stowage compartment and the rear wall.
the boot separator. X Push press-studs 2 of the draught stop
The boot separator is unlocked. onto the corresponding counterpieces.
X Pull draught stop 1 over the roll-over bars.
Pull the edge, not the net, when doing so.

* optional
135
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 136
vpfaff7,

Controls

Loading and stowing

Removing Loading and stowing
X Pull draught stop 1 off the roll-over bars. Cup holder
G Risk of injury
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occu-
pants could be injured by objects being
thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply

Rchange direction suddenly

1 Cup holder
Rare involved in an accident
X To open: press lightly on the cover of cup
Only use the cup holders for containers of
holder 1.
6 Handle a suitable size and which have lids. Other-
wise, the drinks could spill. The cup holder slides out automatically.
X Detach press-studs 2. To do this, pull han- Cup holders should not be used for hot
dle 6. drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself.
X Unhook retainer loop 3.
Roof rack system*
G Risk of accident
You can only mount a roof rack on vehicles
that have covers on the front roof pillars
and reinforced rear wheel arches.
Only use the roof rack when basic carrier
bars are fitted. The left and right rails are
only stabilised by the basic carrier bars
being fitted.

* optional
136
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 137
vpfaff7,

Controls

Loading and stowing

An incorrectly secured roof rack or load Luggage net in the front-passenger
could work loose from the vehicle and footwell
thereby cause an accident. Follow the roof
rack manufacturer's installation instruc- G Risk of injury
tions and special instructions for use. Only place lightweight items in the luggage
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky,
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event
You must observe the maximum roof load of an accident, the luggage net will not
of 50 kg. Always adapt your driving style to secure the transported goods.
the prevailing road, traffic and weather con-
ditions and drive with particular care if the 1 Covers
roof is laden. Stowage well under the boot floor
2 Rear mounting point for the roof rack
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you X Push cover 1 firmly at the corrugated end. located in the stowage compartment.
only use roof rack systems which have X Prise the upper end out carefully, using an
been tested and approved for Mercedes-
old credit card, for example.
Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle. X Fasten the carrier bars to the areas marked
Position the load on the roof rack in such a by red spots. Observe the manufacturer's
way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- installation instructions.
age even when it is in motion. G Risk of injury
Do not open the roof if a roof rack is fitted. Only use the roof rack when the roof is
You will otherwise damage the roof. closed. The roof rack or the load could
Leave the boot separator in the boot open endanger the occupants of the vehicle
for protection. when the roof is open.
1 Boot floor
Make sure that you can open the boot lid
completely. 2 Opening

137
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 138
vpfaff7,

Controls

Loading and stowing

X To open: Swing boot floor 1 up by the Do not carry hard objects in the ruffled Stowage compartment under the arm-
opening 2. pockets. Objects must not protrude over rest
the top of the ruffled pockets. i The stowage compartment is locked and
Boot unlocked via the central locking.
Glove compartment There is a credit card holder in the stowage
The boot provides space for two golf bags. We compartment lid.
recommend that you remove the long golf i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
The mobile phone bracket* is located in the
clubs from the bags and place them sepa- CD changer* is located in the glove com-
stowage compartment.
rately in the boot. partment.
The glove compartment is locked and
unlocked via the central locking.
Stowage compartments
G Risk of injury
The stowage compartments must be closed
when items are stored in them. Luggage
nets are not designed to secure heavy
items of luggage.
You or other vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if
you: 1 Armrest
Rbrake sharply
X To open: lift armrest 1.
Rchange direction suddenly 1 Handle
Rhave an accident 2 Glove compartment lid
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not X To open: pull handle 1 and open glove
be carried in the luggage net.
compartment lid 2.

* optional
138
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 139
vpfaff7,

Controls

Loading and stowing

Upper stowage compartment in the Lower stowage compartment in the Stowage box in the rear wall between
centre console centre console the seats

1 Stowage compartment 1 Stowage compartment 1 Opening button

2 Stowage box
X To open: press the cover of stowage com- X To open: press the cover of stowage com-
partment 1. partment 1. X To open: press button 1.
The cover swings upwards. The stowage compartment opens.

139
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 140
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
Features park ticket in slot 3, make sure that it is Ashtray*
not blown out by the wind.
Sun visors
G Risk of accident Mirror in the sun visor
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered Mirror light 1 only comes on if the sun visor
while driving. You could otherwise be daz-
is clipped into retainer 2 and mirror cover
zled by bright lights, impairing your view of
5 has been folded up.
traffic conditions. As a result you could
cause an accident.
Glare from the side*
X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor from retainer 2. 1 Cover
X Swing the sun visor to the side. X To open: press cover 1 lightly.
X Slide the sun visor forwards and back as The ashtray opens.
required.
X To remove the insert: open the ashtray.
X Remove the insert.
X To refit the insert: press the insert down
into the holder until it clicks into place.
1 Mirror light
2 Retainer
3 Slot, e. g. for a car park ticket
4 Vanity mirror
5 Mirror cover

i When driving at high speeds with the win-

dow or roof open: if you have inserted a car

* optional
140
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 141
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
Cigarette lighter* 12V socket Mobile phone*
G Risk of injury and fire The socket can be used for accessories with G Risk of accident
a maximum power consumption of 180 watts.
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its Observe the legal requirements of the
knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. country in which you are currently driving
Make sure that children travelling in the regarding operating mobile communica-
vehicle are not able to injure themselves on tions equipment in a vehicle.
the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with If it is permitted by law to operate commu-
it. nications equipment while the vehicle is in
motion, you must only do so when the traf-
fic situation allows. You could otherwise be
distracted from the traffic conditions,
cause an accident and injure yourself and
others.
1 Socket Two-way radios and fax equipment used
without low-reflection exterior aerials can
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in interfere with the vehicle's electronics and
the ignition lock. thereby jeopardise the operating safety of
X Fold the cover upwards. the vehicle and your safety. You must there-
fore only use this equipment if it is correctly
connected to a separate reflection-free
1 Cigarette lighter
exterior aerial.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock. G Risk of injury
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
X Press in cigarette lighter 1. cause damage to your health and the health
Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automati- of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into
cally when the heating element is red-hot. account current scientific discussions
Z

* optional
141
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 142
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
relating to the possible health risk posed by Inserting the mobile phone into the 3 Mobile phone bracket
electromagnetic fields. mobile phone bracket
X Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
If the mobile phone is inserted into the mobile into connector contact 2 in mobile phone
i In order to ensure optimum signal quality phone bracket, you can only speak to the per- bracket 3.
for mobile phones and to minimise mutual son you are calling using the hands-free sys-
interference between the vehicle electron- tem. X Push the top part of the mobile phone in
ics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz rec- the direction of arrow 1 until it engages in
ommends the use of an approved exterior ! Do not attempt to remove the mobile mobile phone bracket 3.
aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec- phone and the telephone bracket together.
The mobile phone is connected to the
tromagnetic fields generated by a wireless You could otherwise damage the mobile
hands-free system and to the multi-func-
device to the exterior of the vehicle; the phone bracket.
tion steering wheel.
field strength within the vehicle interior is X Remove the cover of the aerial plug from The battery is charged depending on the
lower than in a vehicle that does not have the back of the mobile phone and keep it in charge status and the position of the key in
an exterior aerial. a safe place. the ignition lock. The charging process is
i There are various mobile phone brackets shown in the mobile phone display.
that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some i The system reads the phone book stored
cases these are country-specific. You can on the SIM card and in the mobile phone
obtain these mobile phone brackets from a memory. If the same entry is stored in both
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a of the phone books, both of these entries
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The func- will be shown in the multi-function display.
tions and services available when you use
the phone depend on your mobile phone You can make a call using the s and
model and service provider. t buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel. You can control other mobile phone
The mobile phone bracket is in the armrest.
functions via the on-board computer
X Open the telephone compartment
Example illustration (Y page 108).
(Y page 138). 1 To engage the mobile phone i When you remove the key from the igni-
2 Connector contact tion lock, the mobile phone remains

142
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 143
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
switched on for approximately ten minutes For information on how to create a phone existing mobile phone bracket and then fit the
(run-on time). If you make a call during this book entry, refer to the mobile phone oper- new one.
time, the mobile phone will be switched off ating instructions.
approximately ten minutes after you have Removing the existing mobile phone
ended the call. bracket
Removing the mobile phone from the
Run-on time: mobile phone bracket
You can change the run-on time by making
an additional phone book entry on the SIM
card. For the name, enter "Idletime" and for
the number, enter a figure between "1" and
"30" (minutes). If you have not entered a
number or have entered a different num-
ber, the run-on time of ten minutes will still
apply.
For information on how to create a phone
book entry, refer to the mobile phone oper- Example illustration
ating instructions. 1 To release the mobile phone bracket
Own number sending: Example illustration 2 To remove the mobile phone bracket
The hands-free system does not recognise 1 To release the mobile phone 3 Mobile phone bracket
whether own number sending is enabled or 2 Mobile phone bracket
disabled in the mobile phone. The phone X Press the release button in the direction of
number is therefore always sent by default. X Press the release catch in the direction of arrow 1 and remove mobile phone
arrow 1 and remove the mobile phone bracket 3 in the direction of arrow 2.
By creating an additional phone book entry
on the SIM card, you can switch the own upwards from mobile phone bracket 2.
number sending function on and off. For
the name, enter "CALLID" and for the num- Fitting a different mobile phone bracket
ber, enter a "0" or a "1". Entering "0" will
prevent the telephone number from being If you require a different mobile phone
sent; entering "1" will allow it to be sent. bracket for your mobile phone, remove the

143
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 144
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
Fitting a different mobile phone bracket Garage door opener*
Up to three different garage door and gate
systems can be operated using the remote
control integrated into the overhead control
panel.
i The garage door opener is only available
for certain countries. Observe the legal
requirements in all countries concerned.
The HomeLink® garage door opener is
compatible with most European garage and Remote control in the overhead control panel
gate opener drives. More information on 1 Indicator lamp
Example illustration
HomeLink® and/or compatible products is 2 Transmitter button
1 Contact plate
available from:
2 Recesses 3 Transmitter button
Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
3 Mobile phone bracket 4 Transmitter button
Rthe HomeLink® hotline
X Insert mobile phone bracket 3 into (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or G Risk of accident
recesses 2 of contact plate 1. +49 (0) 6839 907-277 (at a charge) Only press the transmitter button on the
integrated remote control if there are no
X Slide mobile phone bracket 3 forwards Rthe Internet: www.homelink.com persons or objects present within the
until it engages. sweep of the garage door. Persons could
otherwise be injured as the door moves.

Programming the remote control

i You will achieve the best results by insert-
ing new batteries in the garage door's
remote control before programming it.

* optional
144
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 145
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
X Erase the memory of the integrated remote tion for at least 20 seconds before trying You will find further information in the
control (Y page 146)before programming another position. garage door opening system's operating
it for the first time. X Keep the transmitter button on the garage instructions, e.g. the sections on “Synchro-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition door's remote control depressed until indi- nising the transmitter” or “Registering a
lock. cator lamp 1 starts to flash rapidly. new transmitter”. You can also call the hot-
line mentioned above.
X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons The programming was successful if indica-
2 to 4 on the integrated remote control. tor lamp 1 flashes rapidly.
Opening or closing the garage door
Indicator lamp 1 starts to flash after a X Release the transmitter buttons on the
short while. It flashes about once a second. garage door's remote control and the inte- Once programmed, the integrated remote
grated remote control. control will assume the function of the garage
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately door system's remote control. Please read
the first time the transmitter button is pro- If indicator lamp 1 goes out after approxi- the operating instructions for the garage door
grammed. If this transmitter button has mately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly system.
already been programmed, indicator before this:
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lamp 1 will only start flashing at a rate of X Release the transmitter buttons on the lock.
once a second after 20 seconds have integrated and portable remote controls.
elapsed. X Press the transmitter button in the over-
X Repeat the programming procedure. In head control panel that you have program-
X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. doing so, change the distance between the med to operate the garage door.
X Point the garage door's remote control with garage door's remote control and the sig- Garage door system with fixed code: indi-
the transmitter towards the left-hand side nal transmitter buttons in the overhead cator lamp 1 lights up continuously.
of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 control panel.
Garage door system with rolling code: indi-
to 20 cm. cator lamp 1 flashes briefly and then lights
i If the garage door system works with a
i The distance between the garage door's rolling code, after programming you must up for approximately two seconds. This is
synchronise the remote control integrated repeated for up to 20 seconds.
remote control and the integrated garage
door opener depends on the system of the in the overhead control panel with the
garage door system receiver. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
garage door drive. You might require sev- as long as the transmitter button is being
eral attempts. You should test every posi- Z
pressed. The transmission will be halted

145
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 146
vpfaff7,

Controls

Features
after a maximum of 20 seconds and indi- sary. A floormat which is not properly
cator lamp 1 will flash. Press the trans- secured can slip and thereby interfere with
mitter button again if necessary. the movement of the pedals.
Do not place floormats on top of one
Clearing the remote control memory another.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press and hold transmitter buttons 2 and
4 for approximately 20 seconds until indi-
cator lamp 1 flashes rapidly.
The memory is cleared.

i You should clear the remote control mem-

ory before selling the vehicle.

1 Press-studs
Floormat* on the driver's side
2 Retainers
G Risk of accident
X Slide seat backwards.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are X To fit: place the floormat in position.
used, and that the floormats are properly X Press stud 1 onto retainer 2.
secured.
The floormats must be secured at all times X To remove: pull floormat off retainers 2.
using retainers and studs. X Remove the floormat.
Before you drive off, make sure that the
floormats are secure and rectify if neces-

* optional
146
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 147
vpfaff7,

Operation

The first 1,500 km ............................ 148

Refuelling ........................................... 148
Engine compartment ........................ 150
Tyres and wheels .............................. 155
Winter driving ................................... 160
Driving tips ........................................ 162
Driving abroad ................................... 164
Service ............................................... 165
Care .................................................... 166

147
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 148
vpfaff7,

Operation

Refuelling
The first 1,500 km i You should also observe these notes if the Refuelling
engine or rear axle transmission on your
If you treat the engine with sufficient care vehicle has been replaced. Refuelling
from the very start, it will reward you with G Risk of explosion
excellent performance for a very long period
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
afterwards.
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
RYou should therefore drive at varying road
handling fuels.
and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.
Before refuelling, always turn off the
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- engine.
tle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of
the maximum permissible engine speed for G Risk of injury
each gear. Avoid any contact with fuels.
RChange gear in good time. You can damage your health if your skin
comes into direct contact with fuel or if you
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order inhale the vapour.
to brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission*: ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator petrol engine. Even small amounts of diesel
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- will damage the injection system. Damage
down). caused by adding diesel is not covered by
ROnly
the warranty.
use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving,
e.g. in mountainous terrain. ! Do not start the engine if you accidentally
Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles: refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, you
RDo not drive faster than 140 km/h for the risk engine damage. Consult a qualified
first 1,500 km. specialist workshop and have the fuel sys-
tem emptied completely.
ROnly bring the engine up to a maximum
speed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period.

* optional
148
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 149
vpfaff7,

Operation

Refuelling
When you open or close the vehicle with the X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder formance and increase petrol consump-
key, the fuel filler flap is automatically bracket on the inside of filler flap 2. tion. Avoid driving at full throttle.
unlocked or locked. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle In some countries, the available petrol qual-
The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the right. switches off. ity may not be sufficient and could cause
coking around the inlet valve. In such
! Overfilling the tank could damage the fuel cases, and in consultation with a
system. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly A000989254510). You must observe the
engages. notes and mixing ratios given on the con-
X Close the fuel filler flap. tainer.

AMG vehicles
Petrol (EN 228)
1 To open the fuel filler flap ! Refuel using only super unleaded petrol
! Refuel using only unleaded premium
2 To insert the fuel cap with a minimum octane number of 98
grade petrol with a minimum octane num- RON/88 MON conforming to European
3 Tyre pressure table ber of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to standard EN 228.
4 Fuel type European standard EN 228.
You could otherwise impair engine output
X To open: press the fuel filler flap in the You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine.
direction of arrow 1. or damage the engine.
You will find further information about pet-
You will find further information about pet- rol under "Technical data" in the index.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
rol under "Fuel" in the index.
X Open the fuel filler flap. i If the recommended fuel is not available
Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and i As a temporary measure, but only when
X and only as a temporary measure, you may
remove it. the recommended fuel is not available, you also use premium unleaded petrol,
may also use regular unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce per-
91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce per- Z

149
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 150
vpfaff7,

Operation

Engine compartment
formance and increase petrol consump- Engine compartment The electronic ignition system uses high
tion. You must avoid driving at full throttle. voltage. For this reason you must never
Bonnet touch components of the ignition system
! In emergencies, only when the recom- (ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug con-
mended fuel is not available, you may also G Risk of accident
nector or test socket) when:
use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
Rthe engine is running
82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results cle is in motion. The bonnet could other-
in considerably higher petrol consumption wise open. Rthe engine is being started
and significantly reduced performance. Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
Avoid driving at full throttle, and only drive is being cranked by hand
Opening
in drive program C.
If no fuel other than regular petrol fuel 91 G Risk of injury X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is per- There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, switched off.
manently available, you should have the even if the engine is not running.
vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the G Risk of injury
Some engine components can become
local after-sales service. very hot. The windscreen wipers and wiper rods
could be set in motion.
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Owner’s Man- When the bonnet is open, you or others
ual and observe the relevant safety notes. could be injured by the wiper rods.
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
G Risk of injury switched off and that the key has been
The radiator fan between the radiator and pulled out of the ignition lock before open-
the engine can start automatically, even if ing the bonnet.
the key has been removed from the ignition
lock. For this reason you must not reach
into the turning area of the fan. You could
otherwise sustain an injury.

150
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 151
vpfaff7,

Operation

Engine compartment
The bonnet release lever is located in the The handle for opening the bonnet is located Engine oil
driver's footwell. in the middle of the radiator grille.
Depending on how it is driven, the vehicle
consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000
km. The oil consumption may be higher than
this when the vehicle is new or if you fre-
quently drive at high engine speeds. You can
only estimate the oil consumption after you
have driven a considerable distance.
You will find further information about engine
oil in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 258).

1 Bonnet release lever 2 Bonnet catch handle Checking the engine oil level
X Pull release lever 1. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han- To do so:
dle 2 up and lift the bonnet. Rthe vehicle should be parked on level
The bonnet is released.
ground
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers Rthe engine should be switched off for at
Closing
are not folded away from the windscreen. least five minutes if the engine was at nor-
You could otherwise damage the wind- G Risk of injury mal operating temperature
screen wipers or the bonnet. Make sure that nobody can become trap- Rthe engine should be switched off for at
ped as you close the bonnet. least 30 minutes if the engine was not at
operating temperature (i.e. if you only star-
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a ted the engine briefly)
height of approximately 20 cm. The bonnet
engages into place.

151
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 152
vpfaff7,

Operation

Engine compartment
Via the on-board computer* Other messages in the multi-function dis- The following message appears if the engine
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in play is running:
the ignition lock (Y page 59). If the engine is at normal operating tempera- Engine oil level Not when engine on
ture and there is too much oil, you will see the X Switch off the engine and wait for five
X Press the j or k button to select the
following message: minutes if the engine is at normal operating
following message:
Eng. oil level temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the
Reduce oil level engine is not at normal operating temper-
X Have excess oil siphoned off. ature (if the engine was only started
briefly), before measuring.
! There is a risk of damage to the engine or
the catalytic converter if there is excess oil i If you wish to cancel the measurement,
in the engine. press the k or j button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
If the Switch ignition on to check
The measurement takes a few seconds. You engine oil level message appears:
will see one of the following messages in the
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
display:
REngine oil level OK
lock (Y page 59).

RAdd
You will see the following message if you did
1.0 litre to reach maximum oil
not observe the required waiting time:
level
Observe waiting period
RAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum oil X Repeat the measurement after about five
level minutes if the engine is at normal operating
RAdd 2.0 litres to reach maximum oil temperature.
level X Repeat the measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is not at normal
X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 153).
operating temperature (if the engine was
only started briefly).

* optional
152
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 153
vpfaff7,

Operation

Engine compartment
Using the oil dipstick i The difference in quantity between lower
mark 3 and upper mark 2 is approxi-
mately 2 litres.

Topping up the engine oil

Example (SLK 350)

Example (SLK 350) 1 Cover
1 Oil dipstick X Unscrew cap 1 and remove it.
2 Upper mark
X Top up by the amount of oil required.
3 Lower mark
Example (SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR) ! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil
X Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dipstick
1 Cover is added, there is a risk of damage to the
tube.
engine or the catalytic converter.
X Wipe off oil dipstick 1.
X Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck.
X Insert oil dipstick 1 into the oil dipstick
tube to the stop, and take it out again. H Environmental note
The oil level is correct if the level is between When topping up the oil, take care not to
lower mark 3 and upper mark 2. spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape
into the soil or waterways. You would oth-
X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 153).
erwise be damaging the environment.

153
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 154
vpfaff7,

Operation

Engine compartment
Coolant Checking the coolant level X Top up the coolant if necessary.
The expansion tank is located in the engine X Replace cap 2 and tighten all the way to
G Risk of injury
compartment on the right-hand side of the the stop.
The cooling system is pressurised. There-
vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. You will find further information about coolant
fore, only unscrew the cap once the engine
has cooled down. The coolant temperature in the "Technical data" section
gauge must display less than 70°C. You (Y page 259).
could otherwise be scalded by escaping hot
coolant.
Windscreen washer system/head-
Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/cor- lamp cleaning system*
rosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
when the vehicle is on a level surface and the
engine compartment on the right when
engine has cooled down.
viewed in the direction of travel. The head-
lamp cleaning system* is also supplied from
1 Expansion tank the washer fluid reservoir.
2 Cover
3 Marker bar

X Slowly turn cap 2 by half a turn anti-clock-

wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X Turn cap 2 further anti-clockwise and
remove it.
There is sufficient coolant in expansion
tank 1 if the coolant is level with marker
bar 3 in the filler neck when cold or
approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. 1 Cover

* optional
154
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 155
vpfaff7,

Operation

Tyres and wheels

X Add windscreen washer concentrate to the X To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. Tyres and wheels
washer fluid all year round. X To close: press cap 1 onto the filler neck Points to remember
G Risk of fire until it clicks into place.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking ommends that you only use tyres and
are prohibited when windscreen washer wheels which have been approved by
concentrate is being handled. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle. These tyres have been specially adap-
Use ted for use with the control systems, such
Ra windscreen washer fluid additive as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
such as MB Summerwash to prevent RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
smearing (for temperatures above freez- RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
ing).
(with run-flat characteristics)*
Ra windscreen washer fluid additive with
antifreeze properties such as MB Winter- Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres*
wash (if there is a risk of frost). should only be used on wheels that have
been specifically approved by Mercedes-
X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con- Benz.
tainer beforehand. Adapt the mixing ratio If you use other tyres and wheels,
to the outside temperatures. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any respon-
sibility for damage that may result from
! Only use windscreen washer fluid which this. Further information about tyres,
is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuit- wheels and approved combinations can be
able windscreen washer fluid could dam- obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
age the plastic lamp lenses of the head- Centre.
lamps.
If you use tyres other than those tested and
recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles, characteristics such as handling, vehi- Z
cle noise emissions and fuel consumption

* optional
155
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 156
vpfaff7,

Operation

Tyres and wheels

may be adversely affected. In addition, the Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
wheels may come into contact with the tyres and tyres
body or axle components when heavily loa- ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
ded or when driving with snow chains. This
and make. your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
could result in damage to the tyres or the
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the res, tears, bumps on tyres and deforma-
vehicle.
wheels. tion, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels),
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor at least every 14 days, as well as after off-
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since road trips or after travelling on rough roads.
erate speeds for the first 100 km as they Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre
previous damage cannot always be detec- only reach their full performance after this
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result, pressure.
distance.
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not the condition of the tread across the whole
fit used tyres if you have no information tyres of the same size are required on the width of the tyre (Y page 157). If neces-
about their previous usage. front and rear wheels. sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat- order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
G Risk of accident surface.
est, regardless of wear. This also applies to
If wheels or tyres other than those which
the spare wheel*. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
have been tested are fitted:
Rthe brakes or chassis components could
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little the valve against dirt and moisture.
be damaged tread depth as this significantly reduces RRegularly check the pressure of all your
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). tyres (including the spare tyre*), particu-
Rwheel and tyre clearances can no longer
larly prior to long trips, and correct the
be guaranteed ! Store tyres that are not being used in a
pressure as necessary (Y page 157).
This could cause an accident. cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect
the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and die-
Modification work on the brake system and sel. Notes on driving
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
noises and unusual handling characteris-
lidates the General Operating Permit for the
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
vehicle.

* optional
156
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 157
vpfaff7,

Operation

Tyres and wheels

cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Direction of rotation erwise they no longer provide adequate
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, grip.
reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as Direction of rotation Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly.
soon as possible to check the wheels and
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation You should thus regularly check the tread
tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk depth and the condition of the tread
could also be causing the unusual handling
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- across the entire width of all tyres. If nec-
characteristics. If you find no signs of dam-
efits if the correct direction of rotation is essary, turn the steering wheel so that
age, have the wheels and tyres inspected
observed. you can see the tyre tread more easily.
at a specialist workshop, for example at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates You could otherwise lose control of the
RWhen its correct direction of rotation. vehicle and cause an accident due to the
parking your vehicle, make sure that
reduced grip of the tyres on the road.
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb i You may fit a spare tyre* against the
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive direction of rotation.
over kerbs, speed humps or similar, try to
do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- Tyre pressures
erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, Tyre tread G Risk of accident
could get damaged.
G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too
Bear in mind that: low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s
active safety, which could lead you to cause
Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads
an accident. You should therefore regularly
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. check the pressure of all your tyres (includ-
You should thus replace tyres that have
ing the spare tyre*), particularly prior to
insufficient tread.
long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the essary.
tread depth is 4 mm or less because oth-
To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure
gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
Z
tyre pressure.

* optional
157
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 158
vpfaff7,

Operation

Tyres and wheels

If the vehicle is to be heavily laden or driven The pressure of warm tyres should only be Tyre pressure loss warning system*
at high speeds, the tyre pressure must be corrected if it is too low for the current oper-
adapted according to the specifications given ating conditions. G Risk of accident
in the fuel filler flap (Y page 148). You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- The tyre pressure loss warning system does
Use the highest specified tyre pressure for ious operating conditions on the inside of not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres-
the spare wheel*. your vehicle's fuel filler flap. sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or flap will help you decide whether the tyre
G Risk of accident pressures should be corrected.
too low can:
Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:
Rshorten the service life of the tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system does
RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies.
not replace the need to regularly check
Rcause increased tyre damage
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even
the valve is leaking. Rhave a negative effect on handling charac- loss of pressure on several tyres at the
teristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) same time cannot be detected by the tyre
Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative
pressure loss warning system.
effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which i The tyre pressure values given for low
could lead to your causing an accident. The tyre pressure loss warning system is
loads are minimum values which offer you not able to warn you of a sudden loss of
Tyre pressure changes by approximately good ride comfort characteristics. pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a
0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient You can, however, also use the values given foreign object.
temperature. for higher loads. These are permissible and In the event of a sudden loss of pressure,
If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosed will not adversely affect the running of the bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care-
spaces where the temperature differs from vehicle. fully. Do not make any sudden steering
the outside temperature, you will have to cor- Also check the tyre pressure of the spare movements when doing so.
rect the measured value accordingly. wheel*.
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-
When the vehicle is driven, the tyre tempera-
H Environmental note sure loss warning system monitors the set
ture, and with it the tyre pressure, will
Check the tyre pressure regularly, and at tyre pressure using the rotational speed of
increase depending on the road speed and
least every 14 days. the wheels. This enables the system to detect
the load on the tyres.
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed
Therefore, you should only correct tyre pres- of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
sures when the tyres are cold. a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning

* optional
158
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 159
vpfaff7,

Operation

Tyres and wheels

message will appear in the multi-function dis- tyres is set correctly for the operating con- Yes Cancel
play. ditions concerned. If you wish to confirm the restart:
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning X Also observe the notes in the section on X Press the æ button.
system is limited or delayed if: tyre pressures (Y page 157).
Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's The following message appears in the
tyres G Risk of accident multi-function display:
The tyre pressure loss warning system can Run Flat Indicator restarted
Rroad conditions are wintry only give reliable warnings if you have set After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel the correct tyre pressure. loss warning system will monitor the set
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these tyre pressures of all four tyres.
nering at high speeds or driving with high incorrect values will be monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart:
rates of acceleration) A tyre with insufficient pressure results in
X Press the ç button.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the an instability of the vehicle when driving,
vehicle or on the roof) thus increasing the risk of an accident. or
X Wait until the message
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in Restart Run Flat Indicator?
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn- the ignition lock. Yes Cancel disappears.
ing system The standard display appears in the multi- The tyre pressure values stored at the last
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system function display (Y page 95). restart will continue to be monitored.
if you have: X Press k or j to select the tyre pres-
Rchanged the tyre pressure sure function:
Rchanged the wheels or tyres Run Flat Indicator active
Rfitted
Menu: R-Button æ
new wheels or tyres
X Press the reset button on the left of the
X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre instrument cluster.
pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
The following message appears in the
to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
multi-function display:
Restart Run Flat Indicator?

159
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 160
vpfaff7,

Operation

Winter driving
Interchanging the wheels Interchange the wheels before a clear wear Winter driving
pattern has formed on the tyres. The front
G Risk of accident tyres typically wear more on the shoulders Introduction to winter operation
Interchange the front and rear wheels only and the rear tyres in the centre. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
if they have the same dimensions: for exam- Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
ple size, offset, etc. the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel Service Centre, at the onset of winter.
After every wheel interchange/change, is changed. Check the tyre pressure and, if
have the tightening torque checked at a necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
qualified specialist workshop that has the warning system*. Winter tyres
necessary specialist knowledge and tools Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 °
to carry out the work required. Mercedes- C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only
Benz recommends that you use a
then can the effect of the ABS and ESP® driv-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
ing systems be ensured in winter too.
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be car- Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
acteristics.
The wheels could work loose if they are not
tightened to a torque of 110 Nm. G Risk of accident
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- You must replace winter tyres with a tread
mends that you only use wheel bolts of the depth of less than 4 mm immediately. They
correct size which have been approved for are no longer suitable for winter use, in par-
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. ticular because they do not provide suffi-
cient grip. This could cause you to lose
The wheels may be interchanged every 5,000 control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of dent.
tyre wear, provided that the vehicle has the
same size front and rear tyres. Do not reverse Always observe the maximum permitted
the direction of tyre rotation. speed specified for the winter tyres you have
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a
differ depending on the operating conditions. lower maximum permitted speed than that of

* optional
160
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 161
vpfaff7,

Operation

Winter driving
the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign Snow chains Do not exceed the maximum permissible
in the driver's field of vision. This can be speed of 50 km/h.
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains which i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
have been specially approved for your vehicle pulling away with snow chains fitted
In such circumstances, you should also (Y page 51). This way you can allow the
by Mercedes-Benz or are of a corresponding
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
standard of quality.
using permanent Speedtronic24 to the maxi- ieving an increased driving force (cutting
mum permissible speed for winter tyres ! Information about the use of snow chain- action).
(Y page 114). compatible AMG winter tyres is applicable
for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only
G Risk of accident
permissible with these tyres. Winter driving
If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with
winter tyres, bear in mind that driving sta- If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind: G Risk of accident
bility will be impaired owing to unstable
RSnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ Do not shift down for additional engine
cornering characteristics caused by the dif-
tyre combinations. braking on a slippery road surface. This
ferent tyres. You should therefore adapt
could cause the drive wheels to lose their
your driving style and drive carefully. RSnow chains must not be fitted to emer- grip and the vehicle could skid.
Have the spare wheel* replaced at the gency spare wheels, e.g. a collapsible
nearest qualified specialist workshop emergency spare wheel. You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
which has the necessary specialist knowl- RFit snow chains to both rear wheels. Com- pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
edge and tools to carry out the work ply with the manufacturer's installation tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends instructions. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service stopped when moving at low speed:
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work ! If snow chains are fitted to the front
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- wheels, they may come into contact with
tems must be carried out at a qualified the bodywork and axle components when
specialist workshop. the vehicle is in motion and damage the
tyre or the vehicle.
Z
24 Only available for certain countries.

161
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 162
vpfaff7,

Operation

Driving tips
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage Driving tips Downhill gradients
neutral.
Rolling with the engine switched off On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
X Vehicles with automatic transmission*: cially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift to
shift the selector lever to N. G Risk of accident a lower gear in good time or, on vehicles with
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using Never switch the engine off while the vehi- automatic transmission*, select shift range
corrective steering. cle is in motion. 1, 2 or 3.
There is no power assistance for the steer- i This also applies if you have activated
ing and the service brake when the engine cruise control or Speedtronic.
is not running.
This uses the braking effect of the engine and
You will require considerably more effort to
you will not have to brake to such an extent
steer and brake and you could therefore
to maintain the same speed. This relieves the
lose control of the vehicle and cause an
load on the brake system and prevents the
accident.
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly. If you need additional braking,
depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather
Braking than continuously.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine Heavy and light loads
braking on a slippery road surface. This If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
could cause the drive wheels to lose their load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
grip and the vehicle could skid. drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
G Risk of accident
Make sure that other road users are not
G Risk of accident
endangered by your braking. Never depress the brake pedal continu-
ously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g.
never cause the brakes to rub by applying

* optional
162
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 163
vpfaff7,

Operation

Driving tips
constant slight pedal pressure. This causes Limited braking performance on salted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which corre-
the brake system to overheat, increases roads spond to an equivalent quality standard.
the braking distance and can lead to the Brake pads/linings which have not been
brakes failing completely.
G Risk of accident approved for Mercedes-Benz or which are not
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-
If the brakes have been used only moderately, brake pads/linings may cause a delay in cle's operating safety.
you should occasionally test their effective- the braking effect, resulting in a signifi-
ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a G Risk of accident
cantly longer braking distance, which could
higher speed. This improves the grip of the lead to an accident. New brake pads/linings only reach their
brakes. optimum braking effect after several hun-
To avoid this danger, you should:
dred kilometres of driving. Before this opti-
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-
mum braking effect is reached, you should
Wet roads ting other road users at risk, when you compensate for the reduced braking effect
If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period are driving on salted roads. This helps to by applying greater pressure when braking.
of time without braking, there may be a remove any salt that may have started to This also applies after the brake discs or the
delayed reaction from the brakes, when brak- build up on the brake discs and the brake brake pads/linings have been replaced.
ing for the first time. You must brake harder. pads/linings.
You must therefore maintain a greater dis- Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular care. High-performance brake system for
tance from the vehicle in front.
AMG vehicles
Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. This Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
way the brake discs will become warm, drying trip and immediately after commencing a The high-performance brake system is
more quickly, which will protect them against new trip, so that salt residues are designed for heavy loads. Braking can there-
corrosion. removed from the brake disc. fore cause noises. This will depend on:
Rspeed

Rbraking force
New brake pads/linings
Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ature and humidity
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
The wear of individual components of the Z
fitted to your vehicle that have been approved
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings

163
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 164
vpfaff7,

Operation

Driving abroad
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- Driving on wet roads Driving abroad
ing style and operating conditions.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth Points to remember
Because of this, it is impossible to state a
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
mileage that will be valid under all circum- An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
planing occurring, even if:
stances. An aggressive driving style will lead is also available in other countries. You can
Ryou drive at low speeds
to high wear. obtain the relevant workshop directories
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and Only low-octane fuel is available in certain
Tyre grip
brake carefully. countries.
G Risk of accident You can find further information about fuel
Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled grades on (Y page 148).
Driving on flooded roads
at a certain speed on dry roads, you must
reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to If you have to drive on stretches of road on
achieve the same road safety. Otherwise which water has collected, please bear in Symmetrical dipped beam
you could cause an accident. mind that: If your journey takes you to countries where
Pay particular attention to the road condi- Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the
tions at temperatures around freezing 12 cm. road to the country in which the vehicle is
point. Ryou
registered, your headlamps must be switched
should drive no faster than at walking
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traf-
pace.
from fog), a light film of water rapidly forms fic will be dazzled less.
on the ice when you brake, considerably ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in X Have the headlamps switched over at a
reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular front or in the opposite direction create qualified specialist workshop, e. g. a
care in such weather conditions. waves. This may cause the maximum per- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
missible water depth to be exceeded.
G Risk of accident
You must observe these notes, otherwise
Have your headlamps switched back to
damage may occur to the engine, electrics
asymmetrical dipped beam if you visit a
and transmission.
country in which traffic drives on the same

164
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 165
vpfaff7,

Operation

Service
side of the road as in the country in which Service is to subtract the battery-disconnection peri-
your vehicle was registered. You may oth- ods from the service date shown on the dis-
erwise dazzle the oncoming traffic and Active Service System PLUS play.
could cause an accident. ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service System,
tells you when the next service is due. When-
Fading out the service message
ever a service is due, this is shown in the
multi-function display: X Press the J reset button on the left of the
Service A due in .. days instrument cluster (Y page 24).
Service A due in .. km
Service A due now Exceeding the service due date
One of the following messages appears in the
multi-function display:
Service A .. days overdue
Service A overdue by .. km
You will also hear a warning tone.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
The letter indicates how much time the work- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
shop will require to carry out the service work. service indicator after the necessary service
The letters displayed range from A for a short work has been carried out.
service duration to H for a long service dura-
i If you fail to have the service performed
tion.
by the specified date, you may be contra-
ASSYST PLUS does not record any periods of vening the relevant laws. Your warranty
time during which the battery is disconnec- may be invalidated and goodwill settle-
ted. In order to maintain the time-dependent ments may be refused.
service schedule, you should call up the
service due date and make a note of it before
you disconnect the battery. The other option

165
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 166
vpfaff7,

Operation

Care
Calling up the service due date Care H Environmental note
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning
Notes on care
ing wheel. cloths and polishing wads in an environ-
Regular and proper care maintains the value mentally responsible manner.
X Switch on the ignition.
of your vehicle.
X Press è or ÿ to select the Basic ! Do not affix:
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
display menu (Y page 95). products. Rstickers
X Press the j or k button to select the Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected Rfilms
service information. by corrosion and damage caused by inade- Rmagnetic plates or similar items
The 9 service symbol and the service quate care cannot always be completely
due date are displayed. repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- to painted surfaces, otherwise you could
cialist workshop immediately, e.g. a damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Repair damage caused by loose chippings
Vehicle care
and remove the following substances imme-
diately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard: ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period
RSoak insect remains with insect remover of time directly after cleaning, especially if
and rinse off afterwards. the wheels have just been cleaned with a
RSoak
wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
bird droppings with water and rinse
rapid corrosion of the brake discs and
off afterwards.
brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park
RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases the vehicle when it is at normal operating
by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in temperature.
petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
RUse silicone remover to remove wax. Automatic car wash
RUse tar remover to remove tar stains. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.

166
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 167
vpfaff7,

Operation

Care
! It is preferable that you use car washes sensor may otherwise be activated, for RTyres
that do not use high-pressure cleaning. instance, leading to inadvertent wiper RDoor joint
With car washes that use high water pres- sweeps being triggered. This could cause
RElectrical components
sures, there is a danger that water may leak damage to the vehicle.
into the vehicle. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off RBattery

wax from the windscreen and the wiper RConnectors

! Do not use a touch-free automatic car
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce RBulbs
wash that uses chemical agents to wash
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
the vehicle. RSeals
screen.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before Damaged seals or electrical components
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. High-pressure cleaners can lead to failures or leaks.
Vehicles with DAB radio only 25:
X Remove the radio/telephone aerial.
G Risk of accident
Cleaning the wiper blades and the out-
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with cir-
side of the windscreen
! If you do not remove the radio/telephone cular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean
aerial, the aerial or the vehicle may be dam- your vehicle or - especially - the tyres. You G Risk of injury
aged by the automatic car wash. could otherwise damage the tyres and Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
cause an accident. lock before cleaning the windscreen or the
! Make sure that the automatic car wash is wiper blades. There is otherwise a risk of
suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in ! Observe the instructions issued by the the windscreen wipers being set in motion
the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is equipment manufacturer concerning the and causing injury.
washed. There is otherwise a risk of dam- distance to be maintained between the
age to the exterior mirrors. nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the
vehicle (at least 30 cm).
! Make sure the side windows are com-
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
pletely closed, the ventilation/heater
around when cleaning your vehicle.
blower is fully turned off and the wind-
screen wiper switch is set to 0. The rain Do not aim directly at any of the following:

25 Only in certain countries.

167
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 168
vpfaff7,

Operation

Care
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition rear windscreen and the side windows with You could otherwise scratch or damage the
lock (Y page 59). hard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. You surface of the lenses.
X Set the windscreen wipers to position I on could otherwise cause damage to the win-
the combination switch (Y page 78). dows, rear window heating or aerial on the
Plastic trim
rear window.
X Turn the key to position 0 or remove it when ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
the wiper arms are vertical (Y page 59). i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or dam-
the windows could interfere with radio or age the surfaces.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away mobile phone reception, especially if it is
from the windscreen when vertical, other- conductive or metal-coated film. Informa- X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free
wise you will damage the bonnet. tion about anti-glare film can be obtained cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth).
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g.
screen until you feel them engage. a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water.
X Clean the windscreen and the wiper blades. Cleaning the headlamps X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is
X Clean the headlamp lenses with a wet solvent-free and non-corrosive. Mercedes-
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
sponge. Benz recommends that you use a
before the ignition is switched on.
Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this
! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable purpose.
as otherwise the coating may come off. for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid
This could cause wiper noise. could damage the plastic lenses of the Cleaning the steering wheel boss and
headlamps. dashboard
Cleaning the windows Therefore, do not use the following:
X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water.
Rdry cloths
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Rsolvents

Clean the insides of the windows with a Rcleaning agents containing solvent
damp cloth or commercially-available glass
cleaner. Avoid touching the inside of the

168
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 169
vpfaff7,

Operation

Care
G Risk of injury vigorously and always wipe entire seat ! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alka-
Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sections to avoid leaving visible lines. line-based cleaning agents such as wheel
sprays containing solvents to clean the Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean- cleaner.
cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners ing results depend on the type of dirt and Use the chrome cleaning agent recommen-
containing solvents cause the surface to how long it has been there. ded by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Infor-
become porous and in the event of an air- RClean Alcantara covers with a damp mation about chrome cleaning agents can
bag being triggered, plastic parts that have cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
become loose could cause considerable sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Service Centre.
injuries.
i Note that leather covers are subject to a Cleaning Parktronic*
natural ageing process because they are a
Leather upholstery* natural product and may react in different The sensors are located in the front and rear
ways (e.g. increased formation of wrinkles) bumpers.
! Cleaning
RClean genuine leather covers using a to certain environmental influences (such
damp cloth, then wipe the covers down as high humidity, intense heat).
using a dry cloth. When doing this, make Note that regular care is essential to ensure
sure that the leather does not become that the quality (both appearance and com-
soaked. For leather care, you should use fort) of the covers is retained over time.
leather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10.
You can purchase this from any Care of exhaust tail pipes (AMG vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. cles)
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
Impurities combined with the effects of road
moistened with a solution containing 1% grit and corrosive environmental factors may
detergent (e. g. washing up liquid). cause flash rust to form on the surface. 1 Parktronic* sensors in the front bumper
RClean fabric covers with a microfibre Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will X Clean sensors 1 in the bumper with water,
cloth moistened with a solution contain- ensure that their original shine is restored. car shampoo and a soft cloth.
ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing up liquid).
When cleaning, take care not to rub too

* optional
169
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 170
vpfaff7,

Operation

Care
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or
damage the sensors. If you intend to use a
high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to
clean the sensors, observe the instructions
issued by the equipment manufacturer
concerning the distance to be maintained
between the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner and the vehicle.

170
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 171
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Where will I find...? ........................... 172

Display messages ............................. 174
Troubleshooting ................................ 190
Locking/unlocking in an emer-
gency ................................................. 210
Changing the batteries ..................... 212
Changing the bulbs ........................... 213
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 217
Flat tyre ............................................. 218
Battery ............................................... 230
Towing and tow-starting .................. 234
Fuses .................................................. 237

171
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 172
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Where will I find...?

Where will I find...? Setting up the warning triangle Vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit, jack and
collapsible wheel* (spare wheel)
Warning triangle
The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit, etc. are loca-
The warning triangle is secured on the inside
ted in the stowage well underneath the boot
of the boot lid.
floor.
i When using the jack, you should also
observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre"
section (Y page 218).

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

1 Retainer
2 Side reflectors
3 Feet

1 Warning triangle X Fold feet 3 down and out to the side.

2 Catch X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using
Removing the warning triangle retainer 1.

X Turn catch2 in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove warning triangle 1. Vehicle tool kit
1 TIREFIT kit
2 Jack
3 Towing eye
4 Centring pin
5 Wheel wrench

* optional
172
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 173
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Where will I find...?

6 Valve extractor against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is
7 Electric air pump being changed.

Vehicles with a collapsible spare

wheel*

Vehicle tool kit

1 Folding wheel chock
2 Jack 1 To fold the plates upwards
3 Sheet for faulty wheel 2 To fold out the lower plate
4 Centring pin 3 To insert the plate
5 Towing eye
1 Collapsible spare wheel X Fold both plates 1 upwards.
6 Wheel wrench
2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible spare X Fold out lower plate 2.
7 Valve extractor
wheel)
8 Electric air pump X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
3 Retaining screw
openings in base plate 3.
X Turn retaining screw 3 anti-clockwise. Setting up the folding wheel chock
X Remove collapsible spare wheel 1. The folding wheel chock serves as an addi-
tional measure for securing the vehicle

* optional
173
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 174
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Fire extinguisher* First-aid kit Display messages
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after The first-aid kit is located in the boot under Notes
each use and checked every one or two the inner floor.
The on-board computer shows warnings or
years. Otherwise, it may fail in an emer- i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit malfunctions in the multi-function display.
gency. regularly, and replace the contents if nec- Certain display messages are accompanied
Observe the legal requirements in all coun- essary. by a warning tone or a continuous tone.
tries concerned. The multi-function display shows high-priority
The fire extinguisher is located underneath display messages in red. In the following
the front of the driver's seat. tables, these display messages are printed in
red.
Please respond in accordance with the dis-
play messages and follow the additional
notes in this Owner's Manual.
G Risk of accident
No further messages can be displayed if
there is a malfunction in the instrument
cluster and/or the multi-function display.
This means that you will not see information
about the driving situation, such as the
1 Tab speed, outside temperature, warning/indi-
2 Fire extinguisher cator lamps, display messages or system
failures. The vehicle's handling character-
X Pull tab 1 upwards. istics may be affected. Adjust your driving
X Remove fire extinguisher 2. style and speed accordingly.
Immediately consult a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary special-
ist knowledge and tools to carry out the

* optional
174
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 175
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- messages. Other messages remain visible in X Use the è, ·, j or k button
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz the multi-function display until you hide them to select another display.
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- yourself. The on-board computer saves certain dis-
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- Some high priority display messages cannot play messages in the message memory
related systems must be carried out at a be hidden. The multi-function display shows (Y page 100).
qualified specialist workshop. these messages continuously until the cau-
ses of the messages have been remedied.
The following tables contain all the display
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
messages.
ing wheel.
Hiding display messages
After a few seconds, the on-board computer
automatically hides some low priority display

Text messages

G Risk of accident and injury

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not
carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury.

175
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 176
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

120 km/h Maximum speed The maximum speed has been excee- X Drive more slowly.
exceeded ded26.

ABS ABS, ESP inopera- G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

tive See Owner's X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a
Manual ately.
fault. BAS has also been deactivated.
The brake system continues to function
normally, but without the functions listed
above.

ESP unavailable See G Risk of accident X Drive a short distance at a speed above 20km/
Owner's Manual h.
ESP® is temporarily unavailable. It is pos-
sible that the self diagnosis is not yet If the display message disappears, ESP® is
complete. available again.
ABS is still operational.
The brake system continues to function
normally, but without ESP®.

26 Only for certain countries.

176
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 177
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ESP unavailable See G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ESP® is unavailable due to undervoltage.
BAS might also be deactivated. It is pos- ately.
sible that the battery is not being charged.
ABS is still operational.
The brake system continues to function
normally, but without ESP®.

ESP inoperative See G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.

Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS might also be deactivated. ately.
The brake system continues to function
normally, but without ESP®.

Transmission Consult workshop The operating reliability of the automatic X Drive on carefully.
transmission* can no longer be fully guar- X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
anteed. ately.

* optional
177
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 178
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system* X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden
has detected a significant pressure loss. steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention
to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tyres.
X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if nec-
essary (Y page 157).
X Repair or change the faulty wheel as necessary
(Y page 218).
X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system* once the tyre pressure is correct
(Y page 158).

Check tyres, then restart Run There was a tyre pressure warning mes- X Make sure that the pressure is correct for all
Flat Indicator sage. tyres (Y page 157).
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem* (Y page 158).

Run Flat Indi- inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system *is X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
cator deactivated due to a malfunction.

SRS Restraint system The restraint systems are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
malfunction Con- ately.
sult workshop

* optional
178
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 179
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

Cruise control inoperative Speedtronic and cruise control are X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
and SPEEDTRONIC unavailable.

Symbol messages

G Risk of accident and injury

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not
carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury.

Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

Ê The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid.

O G Risk of accident X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic

conditions as you do so.
You are driving with the bonnet open.
X Close the bonnet.

J At least one door is open. X Close the doors.

179
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 180
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120†,
you can continue driving to the nearest quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine
(e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-
and-go driving.

# The battery is not being charged. Possible

causes are a torn poly-V-belt or a faulty
X Stop immediately and safely when traffic con-
ditions allow and check the poly-V-belt.
alternator. X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

2 Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached

their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon
as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

3 Check brake fluid

level
G Risk of accident X Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the X Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
brake fluid reservoir. ces.
X Consult the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rec-
tify the malfunction.

180
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 181
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

! Release parking
brake
You are driving with the handbrake
applied.
X Release the handbrake.

M Close boot separa-

tor
The boot separator is open. X Close the boot separator (Y page 134).

D Coolant Stop,
switch engine off
The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
conditions as you do so.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait until the message disappears before
restarting the engine. There is otherwise a risk
of engine damage.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge
(Y page 96).
X If the temperature increases again, visit a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately.

181
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 182
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

D Coolant Stop,
switch engine off
The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
conditions as you do so.
X Switch off the engine.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X If it is not damaged: do not start the engine
again until the message disappears. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.

B Top up coolant See

Owner's Manual
The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning
notes before doing so (Y page 154).
X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop if the coolant needs top-
ping up more often than usual.

. Dipped beam, left

or
The right-hand or left-hand dipped-beam
headlamp is faulty.
X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb
(Y page 213).
Dipped beam, right X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified special-
ist workshop.

* optional
182
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 183
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

. AUTO lights inop-

erative
The light sensor is faulty. Constant head-
lamp mode is switched on.
X Switch the lights to manual control in the on-
board computer (Y page 104).
X Switch the lights on and off using the light
switch.

. Rear left turn sig- The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn
nal Back-up bulb on signal is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

or
Rear right turn
signal Back-up
bulb on

. Turn signal in
left-hand mirror
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-
hand exterior mirror is faulty. This mes-
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

or sage will only appear if all LEDs have

Turn signal in failed.
right-hand mirror

. Front left turn

signal Back-up
The front left-hand or right-hand turn sig-
nal is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

bulb on
or
Front right turn
signal Back-up
bulb on
Z

183
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 184
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

. Brake/tail lamp
left
The left-hand or right-hand brake lamp is
faulty. This message will only appear if all
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

or LEDs have failed.

Brake/tail lamp
right

. 3rd brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This mes-
sage will only appear if all LEDs have
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

failed.

. Main beam left

or
The left-hand or right-hand main-beam
headlamp is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

Main beam right

. Licence plate
lamp, left
The left-hand or right-hand licence plate
lamp is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

or
Licence plate
lamp, right

. Turn off lights You did not switch off the lights when
leaving the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to M or U.

. Turn off lights or

remove key
The light switch is on U and you have
forgotten to remove the key. The side
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
or
lamps remain switched on. X Turn the light switch to M.

184
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 185
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

. Front foglamp,
left
The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp
is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

or
Front foglamp,
right

. Rear foglamp Back-

up bulb on
The rear foglamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

. Parking lamp,
front left Back-up
The front left-hand or right-hand parking
lamp is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

bulb on
or
Parking lamp,
front right Back-
up bulb on

. Reversing lamp,
left
The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp
is faulty.
X Replace the bulb (Y page 213).

or
Reversing lamp,
right

185
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 186
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

. Left-hand tail
lamp Back-up bulb
The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp is
faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

on
or
Right-hand tail
lamp Back-up bulb
on

N Check eng. oil

level when next
Vehicles with an oil dipstick: the engine oil
level has dropped to a critical level.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 151) and top
up the engine oil if necessary.
refuelling X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine
oil needs topping up more often than usual.

N Add 1 litre engine Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the

oil when next refu- engine oil level is too low.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 151) and top
up the engine oil if necessary.
elling X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine
oil needs topping up more often than usual.

N Engine oil level

Stop, switch
Vehicles without a dipstick: there is not
enough oil in the engine. There is a danger
X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic
conditions as you do so.
engine off of engine damage. X Switch off the engine.
X Top up the engine oil and check the level
(Y page 151).

186
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 187
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

N Engine oil level

Reduce oil level
Vehicles without an oil dipstick: you have
added too much engine oil. There is a risk
X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the
specified level. Observe the legal require-
of damaging the engine or catalytic con- ments.
verter.

N Cannot measure
engine oil level
Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the meas-
uring system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

± Display malfunc- One or more electronic systems are

tion Drive to work- unable to deliver information to the on-
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

shop board computer. The following systems

may have failed:
RCoolant temperature gauge
RRev counter
RCruise control or Speedtronic display

I Remove key You have left the key in the ignition lock. X Remove the key.

I Please replace key The key no longer functions. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4 Reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the reserve
range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

t Enter PIN You have not yet logged on to your mobile

phone*.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.

* optional
187
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 188
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between your

mobile phone and the audio system* or
X If desired, activate the Bluetooth connection
between your mobile phone and the audio sys-
COMAND APS* is not activated. tem* or COMAND APS* – please refer to the
separate operating instructions.

t No telephone
inserted
Your mobile phone is not inserted in the
bracket*.
X Insert the mobile phone into the
bracket* (Y page 141).

K Vario-roof Opera- You tried to open the roof while the vehicle
tion only at stand- was moving.
X Stop safely when traffic conditions allow and
operate the soft top again.
still

K Vario-roof lower-
ing
The roof is not fully opened or closed. The
hydraulics are depressurised.
X Fully open or close the roof.

K Open / close Vario- The roof is not locked.

roof completely
X Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.
X Push or pull the roof switch (Y page 133), until
the roof is fully open or closed.

K Vario-roof opera-
tion Please wait
The on-board voltage is too low. X Start the engine.

The roof has been opened and closed sev- You can open and close the roof again after
eral times in a row. The roof drive has been approximately ten minutes.
switched off automatically for safety rea- X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
sons.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

* optional
188
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 189
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Display messages
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir has dropped below the mini-
X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 154).

mum.

189
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 190
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Points to remember

G Risk of accident and injury

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not
carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised. There is a risk of accident and injury.

Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

One or all of the indicator lamps There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
in the seat heating* button are because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
flashing. switched on. The seat heating* The seat heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as
has switched itself off automati- there is sufficient voltage again.
cally.

The AIRSCARF neck-level heat- There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ing* function has switched itself because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
off prematurely or cannot be switched on. X Switch on the AIRSCARF neck-level heating* function again.
switched on.

* optional
190
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 191
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The indicator lamp in the 9 or Cooling has been deactivated X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
2 button of the Thermatic*/ due to a malfunction.
Thermotronic* control panel is lit.
The cooling system cannot be
switched on.

The indicator lamp in the ¯ There is insufficient voltage X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
rear-window heating button is because too many consumers are interior lighting, etc.
flashing. The rear-window heat- switched on. The rear-window heating will automatically switch back on as soon
ing has switched itself off prema- as there is sufficient voltage again.
turely or cannot be switched on.

The 75 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child

AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the seat with automatic child seat
centre console is lit. recognition has been fitted to the
front-passenger seat. The front-
passenger airbag has therefore
been disabled.

* optional
191
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 192
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The 75 PASSENGER G Risk of injury X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.:
AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the RNotebooks
There is no child seat fitted to the
centre console is lit.
front-passenger seat. The auto- RMobile phones
matic child seat recognition is RCards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes
malfunctioning.
If the 75 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still
lit:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

192
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 193
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

- The yellow ABS warning G Risk of accident X Drive on carefully.
lamp comes on while the X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
ABS has been deactivated due to
engine is running. (Y page 174).
a malfunction. Therefore, ESP®
and BAS are also deactivated, for X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
example.
The brake system continues to
function normally, but without
electronic support. The wheels
could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
- The yellow ABS warning G Risk of accident X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
lamp comes on while the interior lighting, etc.
ABS has been deactivated due to
engine is running. ABS will be available again as soon as the vehicle's electrical sys-
undervoltage. It is possible that
the battery is not being charged. tem voltage increases.
Therefore, ESP® and BAS are also
deactivated, for example.
The brake system continues to
function normally, but without
electronic support. The wheels
could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
Z

193
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 194
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pull-
lamp flashes while the ing away.
ESP®, ABS or traction control has
vehicle is in motion. X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.
intervened because at least one
wheel has reached its grip limit X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
and is threatening to spin or lock. X Do not deactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 51).

v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident X Reactivate ESP®.

lamp is lit while the engine Exceptions: (Y page 51).
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will
is running.
not stabilise the vehicle if it starts X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
1 The red SRS warning lamp G Risk of injury X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
is lit while the engine is
The restraint systems are faulty.
running.
The airbags or belt tensioners
may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an acci-
dent, not be triggered at all.
3 The red brake system You are driving with the hand- X Release the handbrake.
warning lamp comes on brake applied. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while you are driving. You
will also hear a warning
tone.

194
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 195
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
3 The red brake system G Risk of accident X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
warning lamp comes on X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
There is insufficient brake fluid in
while the engine is run-
the fluid reservoir. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
ning.
(Y page 174).
X Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This will
not rectify the fault.

± The yellow engine diagnos- There may be a malfunction: X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
tics warning lamp comes Rin the fuel injection system cialist workshop.
on while the engine is run-
Rin the exhaust system
ning.
Rin the ignition system

The emission limit values may be

exceeded and the engine may be
running in emergency mode.
< The red seat belt warning The seat belt warning lamp X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 69).
lamp lights up for 6 sec- reminds the driver and front
onds after the engine passenger to fasten their seat
starts up27. belts.

< After the engine starts you G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 69).
will hear a warning tone for The warning tone ceases.
The driver's seat belt is not fas-
up to 6 seconds27.
tened.
Z
27 Only for certain countries.

195
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 196
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions
< The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 69).
lamp lights up after start- The warning lamp goes out.
The driver or front passenger has
ing the engine, as soon as
not fastened their seat belt.
the driver's door or the
front-passenger door is Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them
G Risk of injury X
closed. safely.
There are objects on the front-
passenger seat. The warning lamp goes out.

< The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 69).
lamp flashes and you hear The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
The driver or front passenger has
an intermittent warning ceases.
not fastened their seat belt. At
tone.
the same time, you are driving
faster than 25 km/h or have
briefly driven faster than
25 km/h.

G Risk of injury X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them
safely.
There are objects on the front-
passenger seat. At the same The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
time, you are driving faster than ceases.
25 km/h or have briefly driven
faster than 25 km/h.

196
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 197
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

A The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
warning lamp comes on reserve range.
while the engine is run-
ning.

Warning tones

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The alarm of the anti-theft warn- You have opened the vehicle X Switch off the alarm (Y page 53).
ing system* is triggered. using the emergency key element
without deactivating the anti-
theft alarm system* first.

You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multi- X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 174).
function display.

You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the hand- X Release the handbrake.
brake applied.

You hear a warning tone. You have opened the driver's X Turn the light switch to M or U.
door without switching off the
lights first.

* optional
197
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 198
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

You hear a warning tone. G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 69).
The driver or front passenger has
not fastened their seat belt.

You hear a warning tone. Vehicles with automatic trans- X Move the selector lever to P.
mission*:
You have:
Rswitched off the engine
Ropened the driver's door
Rnot moved the selector lever to
position P

* optional
198
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 199
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Accident

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of fire X Switch off the ignition immediately.
The fuel line or the fuel tank has X Remove the ignition key.
been damaged. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You are unable to determine the X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

extent of the damage.

You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal.

199
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 200
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. G Risk of fire X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
remove it.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is
defective. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot be The fuel filler flap is not released. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 210).
opened.
The opening mechanism is jam- X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
med.

200
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 201
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Engine

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The engine will not start. You can RThere is a malfunction in the X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the next
hear the starter motor operating. engine electronics. starting attempt.
RThere is a malfunction in the X Try to start the engine again (Y page 81). When doing so, remember
fuel supply. that excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine will
drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine will not start. You can- The on-board voltage is too low X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 233).
not hear the starter motor oper- because the starter battery is too If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:
ating. weak or discharged.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
smoothly and is misfiring. engine electronics or a mechani- X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
cal component of the engine con- shop.
trol unit.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.

201
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 202
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

A coolant temperature of over The coolant level is too low. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
120 °C is displayed. coolant is too hot and the engine cool down.
is no longer being cooled suffi- X Check the coolant level (Y page 154). Observe the warning notes
ciently. as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the X If the coolant temperature is less than 120°C, you can continue
radiator fan may be faulty. The driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
coolant is too hot and the engine X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. when driving on
is no longer being cooled suffi- mountain roads and stop/start driving.
ciently.

202
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 203
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Automatic transmission*

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The transmission has problems The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
shifting gear immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteri- The transmission is in emergency X Stop the vehicle.
orating. mode. X Move the selector lever to P.
The transmission no longer It is only possible to shift into
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
changes gear. 2nd gear and reverse gear.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is selec-
ted, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.

* optional
203
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 204
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Parktronic*

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified spe-
Parktronic warning display are lit. and has switched itself off. cialist workshop.
You also hear a warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Parktronic is deactivated after
approximately 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Park-
tronic button lights up.

Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 169).
Parktronic warning display are lit. or there is interference. X Switch the ignition back on.
Parktronic is deactivated after
approximately 20 seconds.

Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by an X See if Parktronic functions in a different location.
Parktronic warning display are lit. external source of radio or ultra-
Parktronic is deactivated after sound waves.
approximately 20 seconds.

* optional
204
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 205
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Headlamps and turn signals

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The headlamps or the turn signals Air humidity is very high. X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
in the exterior mirrors are misted The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.
up on the inside.
The headlamp housing is not X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
sealed and moisture has been
able to enter.

Windscreen wipers

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The windscreen wipers are jam- Leaves or snow, for example, may X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
med. be obstructing the windscreen lock.
wiper movement. The wiper X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
motor has been deactivated.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.

The windscreen wipers fail com- The windscreen wiper drive is X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
pletely. malfunctioning. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

205
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 206
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Windows

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

A side window will not close. An object is blocking the side win- X Remove the object(s).
dow and preventing it from clos- X Close the side window.
ing.

You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the anti-
entrapment feature (Y page 80).

Mirrors

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

An exterior mirror has been Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electri-
pushed out of position. cally:
X Push the mirror into the correct position manually.

Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*:

X Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 66) repeatedly until you
hear a distinct click.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror
as usual (Y page 66).

* optional
206
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 207
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Key

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

You cannot lock or unlock the The key batteries are discharged X To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
vehicle using the key. or nearly discharged. close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 210).
X Check the key batteries (Y page 212) and replace them if neces-
sary (Y page 212).

The key is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 210).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The battery charge indicator lamp The key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 212).
of the key does not go on during
the test.

You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.

You have lost the emergency key X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
element. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
Z

207
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 208
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The key cannot be turned in the The key has been in position 0 for X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock.
ignition lock. a considerable time. X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary
(Y page 232).
X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or interior
lighting, and try to turn the key again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary
(Y page 232).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 233).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* optional
208
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 209
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Troubleshooting
Parking up the vehicle

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

The vehicle is to be left parked up Damage resulting from nonuse X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
for longer than six weeks. may occur if the vehicle is parked X Disconnect the battery (Y page 231).
up for long periods.

209
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 210
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Locking/unlocking in an emergency Releasing and removing the emergency Unlocking the vehicle
key element
Emergency key If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-
trally with the key:
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
X Remove the emergency key element from
unlocked with the key, use the emergency
key element. the key (Y page 210).
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door or the boot
lid, the anti-theft alarm system* will be trig-
gered (Y page 52).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X Press the k or j button on the key.

or 1 Release catch
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. 2 Emergency key element

X Push release catch 1 in the direction of

the arrow and at the same time remove $ To unlock
emergency key element 2 from the key.
X Insert the emergency key element fully into
the lock of the driver's door.
X Turn the emergency key element anti-
clockwise to position $.
The door is unlocked.

i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the

emergency key element clockwise.
X Turn the emergency key element back and
remove it.

* optional
210
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 211
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle X Insert the emergency key element fully into
the lock of the driver's door.
If the vehicle can no longer be locked cen-
trally with the key: X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
as far as it will go to position $.
X Open the driver's door.

X Close the front-passenger door and the i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
boot lid. emergency key element anti-clockwise.
X Press the central locking button X Turn the emergency key element back and
(Y page 57). remove it.
X Check whether the locking knob on the X Check whether the doors and the boot lid
front-passenger door is still visible. Press are locked. Boot lock
down the locking knob by hand if neces- $ To unlock the boot
sary. X Insert the emergency key element fully into
Remove the emergency key element from Unlocking the boot
X the boot lock.
the key (Y page 210). ! The boot lid swings upwards when X Turn the emergency key element anti-
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is clockwise as far as it will go to position
enough space above the boot lid. $ and pull the boot lid handle.
If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the The boot is unlocked.
key: X Turn the emergency key element back and
X Remove the emergency key element from remove it.
the key (Y page 210).

$ To lock

211
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 212
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Changing the batteries

Releasing the parking lock manually Changing the batteries Key
(vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion*) Notes
Checking the batteries
It is advisable to have the batteries replaced
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible X Press the j or k button.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
to release the selector lever lock manually to The batteries are in order if the battery
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to charge indicator lamp lights up briefly.
tow the vehicle away. G Risk of poisoning
Batteries contain toxic and caustic sub-
stances. For this reason, keep batteries Changing the batteries
away from children. You require two CR 2025 3V cell batteries.
If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor X Remove the emergency key element from
immediately. the key (Y page 210).
H Environmental note
Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub-
stances.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
1 Selector lever cover
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
2 Release button Service Centre, or to a special collection
point for old batteries.
X Press selector lever cover 1 to the right
and remove it upwards.
X Press release button 2 down and simul-
taneously move the selector lever out of 1 Emergency key element
position P. 2 Battery tray
The selector lever can now be moved to all
positions.

* optional
212
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 213
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Changing the bulbs

X Insert emergency key element 1 into the Changing the bulbs Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but
opening in the key and push in the direction have them replaced at a qualified specialist
of the arrow. Notes on changing bulbs workshop which has the necessary special-
Battery tray 2 is released. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of ist knowledge and tools to carry out the
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure work required.
X Pull battery tray 2 out of the key.
that all bulbs function correctly at all times. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
G Risk of injury a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You
safety or on safety-related systems must be
should therefore allow them to cool down
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
before you change them. Otherwise, you
shop.
could be burned if you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.
Otherwise, they could damage them, for
example, and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may explode and injure you.
1 Batteries H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode
when you change them, particularly if they
X Remove old batteries 1 from the battery
are very hot. You should therefore wear eye
tray.
protection and gloves when you are chang-
X Insert the new batteries beneath the con- ing them.
tact spring with the positive terminal facing
upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. G Risk of injury
X Push the battery tray back into the key Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could
housing until the battery tray engages. get an electric shock and be seriously or
even fatally injured if you touch the electric
X Check the function of all key buttons on the contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never
vehicle. remove the cover from xenon bulbs.

213
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 214
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Changing the bulbs

Overview Front bulbs Rear bulbs

Bulb Type Bulb Type

1 Additional turn LEDs28 7 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W

signal lamp
8 Brake/rear LED28
2 Main-beam H7 55 W lamp
headlamp
9 Licence plate C5W
3 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W lighting

4 Dipped-beam H7 55 W29 a Reversing lamp P 21 W

headlamp or
b Rear foglamp P 21 W
D1S 35 W*30
c Third brake lamp LED28
5 Front foglamp HB4 55 W28
or or
Cornering light* H7 55 W 28
Before changing bulbs
6 Side lamp/park- W 5 W You can replace the following bulbs:
ing lamp
RDipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with
halogen headlamps)
RMain-beam headlamps (vehicles with halo-
gen headlamps)
RSide lamp and parking lamp
28 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
29 Vehicles with halogen headlamps
30 Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

* optional
214
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 215
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Changing the bulbs

RTurn signal lamp (front) Changing the front bulbs
RReversing lamp
RRear foglamp
RTurn signal (rear)
RLicence plate lighting
Observe the following points:
RUse only the bulb types specified here.
RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off the
lights before changing a bulb. Halogen headlamps
ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth. 5 Bulb holder for dipped-beam headlamp
Halogen or bi-xenon* headlamps
RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers. 1 Housing cover for dipped-beam headlamp
RIf the new bulb still does not light up, con- (halogen/bi-xenon headlamps) Replacing dipped-beam headlamps
sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a 2 Bulb holder for turn signal (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 3 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp X Switch off the lights.
4 Bulb holder for side/parking lamps X Open the bonnet.
i Have the headlamp setting checked reg-
ularly at a qualified specialist workshop, X Turn housing cover 1 anti-clockwise and
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. remove it.
X Turn bulb holder 5 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 5.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 5.

* optional
215
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 216
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Changing the bulbs

X Insert bulb holder 5 into the lamp and turn X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 4. Changing the rear bulbs
it clockwise. X Insert bulb holder 4 into the lamp.
X Align housing cover 1 and turn it clock- Changing the tail lamps
wise.
Replacing the turn signal lamps
X Switch off the lights.
Replacing main-beam headlamps (vehi-
cles with halogen headlamps) X Open the bonnet.
X Switch off the lights. X Turn bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it together with the bulb.
X Open the bonnet.
X Unscrew the bulb from bulb holder 2
X Turn bulb holder 3 anti-clockwise and
remove it. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 2.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 3. X Insert bulb holder 2 into the headlamp
and turn it clockwise. Tail lamps
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 3.
1 Rear foglamp
X Insert bulb holder 3 into the headlamp
2 Turn signal lamp
and turn it clockwise.
3 Reversing lamp

Changing the bulbs in the side lamps X Switch off the lights.
and parking lamps X Open the boot lid.
X Switch off the lights. X Open the cover of the tail lamps to the side.
X Open the bonnet. X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and
X Pull out bulb holder 4 with the bulb. remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 4.
X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying
slight pressure, and remove it from the bulb
holder.

216
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 217
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Replacing the wiper blades

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and X Insert licence plate lamp . Replacing the wiper blades
turn it clockwise. X Replace and tighten the screws 1.
X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. G Risk of accident
X Close the cover of the tail lamps. The windscreen will no longer be properly
wiped if the wiper blades are worn. This
may prevent you from observing the traffic
Replacing the licence plate lamp conditions, thereby causing an accident.
Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ide-
ally in spring and autumn.

G Risk of accident
The wiper arms could start moving and
cause an injury if you leave the windscreen
wipers switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock
before replacing the wiper blades.

! Make sure that you touch only the wiper

Licence plate lighting
arm of the windscreen wiper to avoid dam-
1 Screws
aging the windscreen wiper blades.
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the boot lid.
X Remove screws 1.
X Remove licence plate lamp .
X Replace the bulb.

217
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 218
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
Removing Fitting Flat tyre
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or X Place the new wiper blade onto the wiper Your vehicle may be equipped with:
2 in the ignition lock. arm. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 172)
X Set the windscreen wipers to position II X Swing the wiper blade back onto the wiper Ra collapsible emergency spare
(Y page 78) on the combination switch. arm until it engages. wheel* (Y page 173)
X When the wiper arms have reached a ver- X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper Rthe MOExtended run-flat system*
tical position, turn the key to position 0 and arm.
remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
screen. Preparing the vehicle
i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOE tyres*.
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic
as possible on solid, non-slippery, level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Apply the handbrake.

1 To release Vehicles with manual transmission

2 To fold out
X Shift to either first or reverse gear.
X Press on both release clips in the direction
of arrow 1.
Vehicles with automatic transmission*
X Fold the wiper blade away from the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow 2.
X Move the selector lever to P.

* optional
218
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 219
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
For all vehicles Do not start the engine at any time while sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. the wheel is being changed. out the work required.
Make sure that they are not endangered as Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
they do so. supported by the jack. If you do not raise a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
the vehicle as described, it could slip off the purpose. In particular, work relevant to
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door safety or on safety-related systems must be
area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
or the boot lid are opened or closed) and carried out at a qualified specialist work-
one who is not directly assisting in the
you could be seriously injured. shop.
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier. X Do not remove any foreign objects which
X Switch off the engine. Using the TIREFIT kit have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. nails.
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max.
Place the warning triangle (Y page 172) or punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread.
X 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump
warning lamps at a suitable distance. You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperatures
from the stowage well underneath the boot
Observe legal requirements. down to -20 °C.
floor (Y page 172).
G Risk of accident
G Risk of injury
In the following situations, your safety is at
The jack is designed only to raise the vehi- particular risk and TIREFIT is unable to pro-
cle for a short time while a wheel is being vide breakdown assistance:
changed.
Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre
If you intend to work under the vehicle, it greater than 4 mm
must be placed on stands.
Rif the wheel rim is damaged
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden Rif you have driven at very low tyre pres-
blocks or similar as jacking supports. Oth- sures or on a flat tyre
erwise, the jack will not be able to achieve Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
its load-bearing capacity due to the restric- specialist workshop which has the neces- 1 Driver's field of vision sticker
ted height.
2 Wheel sticker

219
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 220
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
X Affix part 1 of the sticker within the driv- If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it Version 1
er's field of vision. cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-
X Affix part 2 of the sticker near the valve ethylene.
on the wheel with the defective tyre. G Risk of injury
G Risk of injury Comply with the manufacturer's safety
instructions shown on the sticker on the
TIREFIT must not come into contact with
electric air pump.
your skin, eyes or clothing.
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your
i Your vehicle may be equipped with one of
eyes or skin, immediately rinse thor-
two different air pumps. Version 1 can be
oughly with clean water.
identified by the flap, behind which the
RChange out of clothing which has come hose with the pressure gauge and cable are Version 1
into contact with TIREFIT immediately. located; version 2 has a pressure gauge
1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a integrated in the electric air pump.
2 Flap
doctor immediately.
3 Recess
Keep TIREFIT away from children. 4 On/off switch
RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately
5 Electric connector with cable
rinse your mouth out thoroughly with
6 Air pump hose
water and drink plenty of water.
7 Flange
RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
immediately. X Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. X Pull connector 5 and air pump hose 6
from the housing.
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
then be removed like a layer of film.

220
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 221
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
X Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange 7 of X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air
TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1. pump to I.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head The electric air pump is switched on. The
downwards into recess 3 of the electric tyre is inflated.
air pump.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.
Do not switch off the electric pump dur-
ing this phase.
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
a Pressure release screw The tyre should then have a pressure of at
b Pressure gauge least 1.8 bar.
X Make sure pressure release screw a on ! Do not operate the electric air pump for
pressure gauge b is fully closed. longer than six minutes without a break.
X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9. Otherwise, it may overheat.
8 Filler hose The air pump can be operated again once
9 Valve
X Insert plug 5 into the socket of the ciga- it has cooled down.
rette lighter* (Y page 141) or into a 12V
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after
X Remove the cap from valve 9 on the faulty power socket in your vehicle
five minutes:
tyre. (Y page 141).
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air
X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 59) in
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or
the ignition lock. backwards approximately 10 m.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.
X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the
electric pump.
X Pump up the tyre again.

* optional
221
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 222
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
G Risk of accident G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after If the tyre pressure is now lower than Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do km/h.
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified not drive any further. Consult a qualified The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed
specialist workshop which has the neces- specialist workshop which has the neces- within the driver's field of vision.
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry The vehicle's handling characteristics may
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- be affected.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- H Environmental note
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro-
related systems must be carried out at a related systems must be carried out at a fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
qualified specialist workshop. qualified specialist workshop. Service Centre.
If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). years at a qualified specialist workshop,
pump to 0. To increase the tyre pressure: switch on e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The electric air pump is switched off. the electric air pump.
X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow To reduce the tyre pressure: open pres-
it away. sure release screw a on pressure
gauge b.
X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
away. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
tyre changed there.
X Pull away immediately.
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly
possible at a qualified specialist workshop,
around the tyre.
e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tyre pressure with
the electric air pump.

222
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 223
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
Version 2 X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air
pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The
tyre is inflated.

i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The

pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.
Do not switch off the electric pump dur-
ing this phase.
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
7 Valve The tyre should then have a pressure of at
8 Filler hose least 1.8 bar.
1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle
2 Recess X Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty ! Do not operate the electric air pump for
3 On/off switch tyre. longer than six minutes without a break.
4 Electric connector with cable Otherwise, it may overheat.
X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7.
5 Air pump hose The air pump can be operated again once
6 Flange
X Insert plug 4 into the socket of the ciga- it has cooled down.
rette lighter* (Y page 141) or into a 12V If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after
X Pull connector with cable 4 and air pump power socket in your vehicle five minutes:
hose 5 from the housing. (Y page 141).
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air
X Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange 6 of X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 59) in pump and drive the vehicle forwards or
TIREFIT filler bottle 1. the ignition lock. backwards approximately 10 m.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.
downwards into recess 2 of the electric X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the
air pump. electric pump.
X Pump up the tyre again.

* optional
223
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 224
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
G Risk of accident G Risk of accident To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after If the tyre pressure is now lower than the electric air pump.
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified not drive any further. Consult a qualified pressure release button 9 next to pres-
specialist workshop which has the neces- specialist workshop which has the neces- sure gauge a.
sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- tyre changed there.
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu- X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as
Service Centre for this purpose. In particu-
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety- possible at a qualified specialist workshop,
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-
related systems must be carried out at a e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
related systems must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident
If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80
km/h.
X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air
The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed
pump to 0.
within the driver's field of vision.
The electric air pump is switched off. The vehicle's handling characteristics may
X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow be affected.
it away.
X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it
H Environmental note
away. Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of pro-
fessionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
X Pull away immediately. Service Centre.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly 9 Pressure release button
around the tyre. a Pressure gauge X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
X Stop after driving for approximately ten years at a qualified specialist workshop,
minutes and check the tyre pressure with
X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
the electric air pump. correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).

224
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 225
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
Changing a wheel and fitting the spare or on safety-related systems must be car- Raising the vehicle
wheel* ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G Risk of accident
The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the Preparing the vehicle
emergency spare wheel* may differ from X Prepare the vehicle as described
those of the standard wheels. (Y page 218).
Your vehicle's handling characteristics will X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead posi-
change when driving with a collapsible
tion.
emergency spare wheel*. Adapt your style
of driving accordingly. X Take the following from the stowage well
beneath the boot floor:
The collapsible emergency spare wheel*
Rthe collapsible emergency spare wheel* 1 Wheel wrench
must only be used for a short time. Do not
exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h Rthe vehicle tool kit X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on
and do not deactivate ESP®. Rthe wheel chock the wheel you wish to change by about one
Never drive the vehicle with more than one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
Rthe jack
collapsible emergency spare wheel* fitted. pletely.
Rthe air pump
G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
Have the collapsible emergency spare X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling If you fail to position the jack correctly, the
wheel* replaced as soon as possible at a away. vehicle may:
On level ground: place chocks or similar Rslip off the jack
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools under the front and rear of the wheel that Rinjure you or others
to carry out the work required. Mercedes- is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish Rbe damaged
Benz recommends that you use a to change.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- It is thus important to ensure that the jack
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
X On downhill gradients: place chocks or is positioned correctly in the respective
similar under both wheels of the other axle. jacking points. Before positioning the jack, Z

* optional
225
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 226
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
remove any dirt that may have collected in
the jacking points.
The jacking points for the jack are located
behind the wheel housings of the front wheels
and in front of the wheel housings of the rear
wheels.

1 Centring pin
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-
tioned directly under jacking point 1. X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring
X Turn crank 3 until the tyre is raised a max- pin 1 from the vehicle tool kit into the
imum of 3 cm from the ground. thread.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
pletely.
1 Jacking point ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
2 Jack dirty surface. This could cause damage to
the bolt and wheel hub threads.
3 Crank
X Remove the wheel.
X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1.

Fitting a new wheel

G Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts.

226
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 227
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
G Risk of accident
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must
not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools
to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service
24h for this purpose. In particular, work rel-
evant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist Wheel bolts
workshop. X Place the collapsible emergency spare
1 Wheel bolts for 7-spoke design light-alloy
wheel* onto the centring pin and push it on.
G Risk of accident wheels, collapsible emergency spare
wheel*
Only use wheel bolts that have been
designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For 2 Wheel bolts for other light-alloy wheels
safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- 3 Collapsible emergency spare wheel*
mends that you only use wheel bolts which
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
surfaces.
vehicles. Other bolts could work loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehi-
cle could topple off the jack.

X All models except vehicles with 7-spoke

light-alloy wheels: remove the container X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
with the wheel bolts from the emergency ger-tight.
spare wheel and take out the wheel bolts.

* optional
227
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 228
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
X Unscrew the centring pin. 3 Electric connector with cable ! Do not operate the electric air pump for
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- 4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and longer than six minutes without a break.
tight. pressure release screw Otherwise, it may overheat.
5 Union nut The air pump can be operated again once
it has cooled down.
Inflating the collapsible emergency X Open flap 1.
spare wheel* with the electric air pump If the tyre pressure is higher than 3.5 bar:
X Pull connector 3 and air hose 4 out of X Open the pressure release screw on the
G Risk of accident the housing. pressure gauge until the tyre pressure is
Pump up the collapsible emergency spare X Make sure that the pressure release screw correct.
wheel before lowering the vehicle, as you on the pressure gauge is closed. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow
could otherwise damage the wheel rim.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre. it away.
The electric air pump is located in the stow- X Screw union nut 5 on air hose 4 onto the
age well under the boot floor. valve. Lowering the vehicle
X Take the electric air pump out of the stow-
X Insert plug 3 into the cigarette lighter X Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crank
age well under the boot floor.
socket* (Y page 141) or into a 12V socket of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle
in your vehicle (Y page 141). is standing firmly on the ground again.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in X Place the jack to one side.
the ignition lock.
X Press on/off switch 2 on the electric air
pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The
tyre is inflated.
X When a tyre pressure of 3.5 bar has been
reached, press 0 on the electric air pump
1 Flap switch.
2 On/off switch The electric air pump is switched off.

* optional
228
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 229
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Flat tyre
is provided with the collapsible emergency X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and
spare wheel. release the air.
X Pack the faulty wheel in the protective film i Fully deflating the tyres can take a few
included with the collapsible emergency minutes.
spare wheel* and transport the wheel in
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
the boot.
X Screw the valve cap back on
i When you are driving with the collapsible X Put the protective film provided over the
emergency spare wheel* fitted, the tyre collapsible emergency spare wheel*.
pressure loss warning system* cannot
1 – 5 Wheel bolts function reliably. X Store the collapsible emergency spare
wheel* in the spare wheel well under the
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- luggage compartment.
wise pattern in the sequence indica- Stowing a used collapsible emergency
spare wheel*
X Fasten the collapsible emergency spare
ted (1 to 5). The tightening torque must
wheel* in place through the protective film
be 110 Nm. If you wish to stow a used collapsible emer- using the screw.
G Risk of accident gency spare wheel* in the vehicle, you must
Have the tightening torque checked imme- follow the steps below, otherwise you will not
diately after a wheel is changed. The wheels be able to stow it. We recommend that this
could work loose if they are not tightened work is carried out at a specialist workshop.
to a tightening torque of 110 Nm. ! Only place the collapsible emergency
spare wheel* in the vehicle when it is dry.
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and Otherwise, moisture may remain in the
store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit boot.
in the boot.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
i If the roof is closed you can transport the X Remove the valve extractor from the vehi-
faulty wheel in the boot. A protective film
cle tool kit.

* optional
229
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 230
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Battery
Battery Battery acid is caustic. Centre or a special collection point for old
Avoid contact with the batteries.
Notes on the battery skin, eyes or clothing.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- Wear suitable protective G Risk of injury
mum possible service life, it must always be clothing, in particular Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for
sufficiently charged. gloves, an apron and a safety reasons, you only use batteries
Have the battery charge checked more fre- face mask. which have been tested and approved for
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short Immediately rinse acid your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These bat-
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a splashes off with clean teries provide increased impact protection
lengthy period. water. Consult a doctor if to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering
necessary. acid burns should the battery be damaged
To prevent damage from corrosion, only
in the event of an accident.
replace the battery with one that has a central Wear eye protection.
ventilation cover. To prevent acid burns, observe the follow-
ing safety notes when handling batteries:
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
RDo not lean over batteries.
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for
a long period of time. Keep children away. RDo not place any metal objects on a bat-

G Risk of injury tery. You could otherwise cause a short

circuit and the battery's highly flammable
Comply with safety precautions and take
Observe this Owner's gas mixture could ignite.
protective measures when handling batter-
ies. Manual. RMake sure that you do not create elec-

Risk of explosion trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing syn-

thetic clothing or as a result of friction on
H Environmental note fabrics. You should not therefore pull or
Do not dispose of batteries with the house- slide the battery over carpets or other
Fire, naked flames and synthetic materials.
hold rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries
smoking are prohibited
in an environmentally responsible manner. RNever touch the battery first. To dis-
when handling the bat-
Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service charge a possible electrostatic charge,
tery. Avoid creating
sparks.

230
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 231
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Battery
step out of the vehicle first and touch the hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the Disconnecting the battery
bodywork. direction of travel.
! Always disconnect the battery in
RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
the order described below. Never swap the
battery may explode as a result of elec- terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
trostatic charge or through the creation age the vehicle electronics.
of sparks.

! Switch the engine off and remove the key

before unscrewing or disconnecting the
terminal clamps from the battery. You may
otherwise destroy electronic components
such as the alternator.
Have the battery checked and, if neces- 1 Battery
sary, replaced at a qualified specialist 2 Negative terminal
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service 3 Positive terminal
Centre, every two years or at least every
20,000 km. 1 Water tank
2 Fastener
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
have all work involving the battery, e.g. X Apply the handbrake and shift the selector
removing, charging and replacing, carried lever to position P on vehicles with auto-
out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. matic transmission*.
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
Installation location of the battery lock and remove it.
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the X Open the bonnet.
engine compartment. It is located on the front Z
X Turn fasteners 2 a quarter of a turn.
bulkhead under the water tank on the right-

* optional
231
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 232
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Battery
X Remove water tank 1. Charging and fitting the battery X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in
X Remove the negative terminal clamp from the operating instructions for your battery
G Risk of injury charger.
the battery.
Only charge the installed battery with a bat- X Refit the charged battery.
X Remove the cover from the positive termi- tery charger which has been tested and
nal clamp. To do this, follow the steps described in
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
"Removing the battery" (Y page 232) in
X Remove the positive terminal clamp from chargers allow the battery to be charged
reverse order.
the battery. while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's electronic system may be damaged. G Risk of injury
X Disconnect the breather hose.
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with
area. As the battery is being charged, gases the skin, eyes or clothing.
can escape and generate minor explosions.
Removing the battery
This may injure you and other persons or
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 231). cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
Reconnecting the battery
X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in rosion on the vehicle.
place. You can obtain information about battery ! Always reconnect the battery in the
chargers which allow the battery to be sequence described below. Never swap the
X Remove the battery.
charged when still installed from a qualified terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz age the vehicle electronics.
Service Centre.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
G Risk of injury X Connect the positive terminal clamp and
There is a risk of acid burns during the secure the cover.
charging process due to the gases which X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
escape from the battery. Do not lean over
the battery during the charging process. X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that
a cell cap is fitted between the battery and
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- the breather hose.
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

232
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 233
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Battery
i If the battery power supply has been inter- i Jump leads which are protected against X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you polarity reversal and further information X Automatic transmission*: move the
must carry out the following tasks: about jump-starting can be obtained from selector lever to P.
RSet the time (Y page 104). any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X All vehicles: switch off all electric consum-
RReset the function for folding the exterior
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting ers.
mirrors in/out automatically* by folding attempts.
the mirrors out once (Y page 66). Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery
charger.

Jump-starting G Risk of injury

There is a risk of acid burns when jump-
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the starting a vehicle due to the gases which
engine can be jump-started from another escape from the battery. Do not lean over
vehicle or from an external battery using jump the battery while the engine is being jump-
leads. started.
Observe the following points:
RJump-starting may only be performed when G Risk of explosion
1 Positive terminal of donor battery
the engine and catalytic converter are cold. Gases escaping from the battery during
jump-starting may cause minor explosions. 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle
RDo not start the engine if the battery has
Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames 3 Negative terminal of donor battery
frozen. Thaw the battery out first.
away from the battery, and do not smoke. 4 Earth point on your vehicle
RJump-starting may only be performed from Comply with safety precautions and take
batteries with a nominal voltage of 12V. X Lift up the cover of positive terminal 2 on
protective measures when handling batter-
ROnly use jump leads which are protected your vehicle.
ies. You will find these under “Battery” in
against polarity reversal and which have a the index. X Connect positive terminal 2 on your vehi-
sufficient cross-section and insulated ter- cle to positive terminal 1 of the donor
minal clamps. X Make sure that the two vehicles do not battery using the jump lead, connecting the
touch. jump lead to your own battery first. Z
X Apply the handbrake.

* optional
233
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 234
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Towing and tow-starting

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and Towing and tow-starting ! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar
run it at idling speed. to the towing eyes. You may otherwise
Points to remember damage the vehicle.
X Connect negative terminal 3 of the donor
battery to earth point 4 of your vehi- G Risk of accident RVehicles with an automatic transmission*
cle using the jump lead, connecting the If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid must not be tow-started.
jump lead to the donor battery first. towing bar if: RIf the engine does not start, try jump-start-
X Start the engine. Rthe engine is not running ing it (Y page 233).
X Electrical consumers can be switched on Rthere is a brake system malfunction RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,
again. Do not switch the lights on however, Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's elec- have it towed to the nearest qualified spe-
as this will overload the battery. trical system is damaged cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
X Remove the jump lead from earth Service Centre.
There is no power assistance for the steer-
point 4 and negative terminal 3 first, ing when the engine is not running.
RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission
then from positive terminal 2 and positive damage, it must only be towed with the rear
terminal 1, each time disconnecting from It is better to have the vehicle transported axle raised.
the battery on your own vehicle first. than to have it towed. RThe selector lever must be in position N on
X Have the battery checked at a qualified When towing, observe the legal requirements vehicles with automatic transmission*.
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz in all countries concerned.
RIf you are towing the vehicle over a consid-
Service Centre. ! When towing, pull away slowly and with- erable distance, this may only be done with
out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, the rear axle raised.
the vehicles could be damaged. Do not use RThe ignition must be switched off if you are
the towing eye for recovery.
towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle
®
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum raised. Intervention by ESP could other-
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must wise damage the brake system.
not be exceeded. RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that
With towing distances over 50 km, the the battery is connected and charged. Oth-
entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and erwise:
transported.

* optional
234
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 235
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Towing and tow-starting

- You cannot switch on the ignition right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in Opening the rear cover
- You cannot move the selector lever the direction of travel.
to N (on vehicles with automatic trans-
mission*)
- You have no support when braking

i Switch off the automatic locking feature

before the vehicle is towed (Y page 105).
You could otherwise be locked out when
pushing or towing the vehicle.

1 Cover
Fitting the towing eye 1 Cover
X Press cover 1 back in the direction of the
Opening the front cover X Press cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow.
arrow.
The mountings for the removable towing eyes X Take cover 1 off the opening but do not
are located in the bumpers. They are located
X Take cover 1 off the opening but do not remove it.
at the front and rear under the covers on the remove it.
Securing the towing eye
X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench
from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 172).
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
stop.
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
towing eye and tighten.

* optional
235
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 236
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Towing and tow-starting

Towing the vehicle Tow-starting (emergency engine Removing the towing eye
starting)
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must Please note: tool kit (Y page 172).
not be exceeded. RVehicles with an automatic transmission* X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
With towing distances over 50 km, the must not be tow-started. towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise.
entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and RThe battery must be connected. X Unscrew the towing eye.
transported.
RThe engine and catalytic converter must be
X Replace the cover and press it until it
! The engine must be switched off (key in cold. engages.
ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if RAvoid repeated and lengthy starting X Return the towing eye and the wheel
the vehicle is being towed with the front attempts. wrench to the vehicle tool kit.
axle raised or if the parking brake is being
tested on a dynamometer. Intervention by
Vehicles with manual transmission
ESP® could otherwise damage the brake
Transporting the vehicle
system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock. The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehi-
cle onto a trailer or transporter for transport-
Vehicles with manual transmission X Shift to neutral.
ing purposes.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Tow the vehicle or let it roll.
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
lock. X Shift to a suitable gear and bring the clutch or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
X Shift to neutral. pedal up slowly. Do not depress the accel- such as axle or steering components. The
erator pedal. vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
The engine is started.
Vehicles with automatic transmission*
Vehicles with manual transmission
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock. X Shift to neutral.
X Move the selector lever to N.

* optional
236
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 237
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Fuses
Vehicles with automatic transmission* Fuses ! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Notes on changing fuses have the correct amperage for the system
lock. concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
X Move the selector lever to N. faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- tems could be damaged.
nents on the circuit and their functions will The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
fail. RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the
i Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses dashboard
of the same rating (which can be recog- RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
nised by the colour and amperage) and left-hand side of the vehicle
which have the amperage specified in the
RFuse box in the boot behind the partition
fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre will be happy to advise you. trim

G Risk of fire
Fuse allocation chart
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have The fuse allocation chart is in the main fuse
the correct amperage for the system con- box in the dashboard. The fuse amperage is
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge also indicated there.
faulty fuses. A circuit overload could other-
wise cause a fire. Have the cause traced
and rectified at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

* optional
237
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 238
vpfaff7,

Practical advice

Fuses
Before changing a fuse X Prise off cover 1 on the recess (arrow), for 3 Clamps
example using a blunt object as a lever.
X Park the vehicle. X Remove moisture from the fuse box using
X Pull cover 1 outwards and remove. a dry cloth.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X To close: clip in cover 1 at the front. X Fold clamps 3 upwards.
X Fold cover 1 inwards until it engages. X Lift fuse box cover 2 up.

Main fuse box in the dashboard

X Close the driver's door. X To close: guide the back lug of cover 2
into the recess. When doing this, make sure
X To open: open the driver’s door.
that the rubber seal is sitting properly and
The main fuse box is located on the driver's Fuse box in the engine compartment that cover 2 is properly fitted onto fuse
side of the dashboard. The fuse box is located in the engine com- box 1.
partment on the left when viewed in the direc- X Press lid 2 down and secure with clamps
tion of travel.
3.
X To open: open the bonnet (Y page 150).
X Close the bonnet (Y page 150).

Fuse box in the boot

The fuse box is in the boot behind the partition
covering.
A tool is required to open it.
1 Cover

! Do not use a pointed object, such as a

screwdriver, to open the fuse box in the
dashboard. You could otherwise damage 1 Fuse box
the dashboard. 2 Fuse box lid

238
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 239
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Introduction to technical data ......... 240

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 240
Vehicle electronics ........................... 241
Vehicle identification plates ............ 242
Engine ................................................ 244
Performance ...................................... 245
Tyres and wheels .............................. 246
Vehicle dimensions .......................... 253
Vehicle weights ................................. 253
Service products and capacities ..... 255
Frequencies for garage door open-
ers* .................................................... 262

239
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 240
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Introduction to technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts
and accessories that have been approved for
i The technical data was determined in Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- your vehicle.
accordance with EU directives. All data version parts and accessories which have H Environmental note
applies to the vehicle's standard equip- been specifically approved for your vehicle for Daimler also supplies reconditioned
ment. The data may therefore differ for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite assemblies and parts which are of the same
vehicles with optional equipment. You can ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is quality as new parts and to which the same
obtain further information from a unable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes- warranty applies.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved
cles, even if they have been independently or conversion parts and accessories are availa-
officially approved. ble from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres.
In Germany and some other countries, certain There, you can also receive advice about tech-
parts are only officially approved for installa- nical modifications and have the parts pro-
tion or modification if they comply with legal fessionally fitted.
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz Always quote the vehicle identification num-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- ber and the engine number when ordering
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's genuine parts. You will find these numbers on
general operating permit. This is the case if: the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet
Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type or on your vehicle's identification plates
from that for which the vehicle's general (Y page 242).
operating permit was granted
Rother road users could be endangered
Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
affected
The use of non-approved parts could affect
your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-
Benz therefore recommends genuine

240
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 241
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Vehicle electronics
Vehicle electronics Retrofitting electrical and electronic Rthey do not have an exterior aerial
equipment Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection
Tampering with the engine electron-
ics Electrical and electronic equipment can jeop- aerial
ardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor-
G Risk of accident equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must rectly
Only have work on the engine electronics be type-approved and bear the e mark. The
and related components carried out at a e mark may be obtained from the equipment
G Risk of injury
qualified specialist workshop which has the manufacturer or an authorised testing centre.
necessary specialist knowledge and tools Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
! Damage or consequential damage arising also cause damage to your health and the
to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
from fitting equipment not approved health of others. Using an exterior aerial
Benz recommends that you use a
by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the takes into account current scientific dis-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Mercedes-Benz warranty. cussions relating to the possible health haz-
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be car- If you wish to install two-way radios in the ards that may result from electromagnetic
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. fields.
The vehicle's roadworthiness could other- Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of For this reason, only have the exterior aerial
wise be affected. two-way radios if such equipment is installed fitted at a qualified specialist workshop
professionally and a low-reflection exterior which has the necessary specialist knowl-
! Only have work done on the engine elec- aerial is used. edge and tools to carry out the work
tronics and its associated parts, such as The transmission output of the two-way radio required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
control units, sensors and connector leads, must not exceed the maximum transmission that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
carried out at a qualified specialist work- outputs listed. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
G Risk of accident tems must be carried out at a qualified
Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components
Two-way radios may interfere with the vehi- specialist workshop.
may wear more quickly and the vehicle may
cle electronics and thereby jeopardise the
lose its liability for material defects and its
operational safety of the vehicle and your i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
operating permit.
own safety if: an approved exterior aerial. This ensures
optimal reception quality for mobile tele- Z

241
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 242
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Vehicle identification plates

phones/wireless devices in the vehicle. Vehicle identification plates
This also ensures that interference
between these devices and the vehicle's Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
electronics is kept to a minimum. If instal- cle identification number (VIN) and
led, the exterior aerial conducts the elec- paint code number
tromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobile The vehicle identification plate is located on
phone to the exterior of the vehicle. the side of the door frame on the front-
passenger side.
Frequency range Maximum trans-
mission output
(watts)
Vehicle identification plate (example)
Short wave (< 50 100 1 Vehicle identification plate
MHz) 2 Vehicle manufacturer
4 m waveband 20 3 EU type approval number
4 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 m waveband 50 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle
70 cm waveband 35 weight
6 Maximum permissible front axle load
25 cm waveband 10 1 Vehicle identification plate
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load
X Open the driver's door. 8 Paint code number
! If electrical or electronic equipment You will see vehicle identification plate
which does not fulfil these conditions is 1.
retrofitted, the vehicle's general operating
permit may be invalidated (EU Directive
95/54/EC – the Automotive EMC Direc-
tive).

242
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 243
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Vehicle identification plates

Vehicle identification number (VIN) Engine number
As well as being shown on the vehicle identi- The engine number is stamped on the engine
fication plate, the vehicle identification num- block (crankcase). More information can be
ber (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
body. It is located in the centre tunnel on the Centre.
front-passenger's side.

1 Trim
2 Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the front-passenger seat to its front-

most position.
X Fold the seat forwards.
X Fold trim 1 upwards.
You will see vehicle identification number
(VIN) 2.

243
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 244
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Engine
Engine

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Rated output 135 kW (184 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp) 224 kW (305 bhp) 265 kW (360 bhp)

At engine speed 5,500 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,500 rpm 5,750 rpm

Rated torque 250 Nm 300 Nm 360 Nm 510 Nm

At engine speed 2,800 – 5,000 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 4,900 rpm 4,000 rpm

Number of cylinders 4 6 6 8

Displacement 1,796 cm3 2,996 cm3 3,498 cm3 5,439 cm3

Maximum engine 6,450 rpm 6,500 rpm 7,200 rpm 6,500 rpm
speed

244
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 245
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Performance
Performance
Speeds

Manual transmission SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR31 SLK 28031 SLK 35031

Maximum speed

Automatic transmission* SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 28031 SLK 35031 SLK 55 AMG
31

Maximum speed 250 km/h

Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR32 SLK 28032 SLK 35032 SLK 55 AMG

6-speed manual transmission —

5-speed automatic transmis- — — —

sion*

7-speed automatic transmis- — 4.9 seconds

sion*

31 Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

32 Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

* optional
245
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 246
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

Tyres and wheels i Further information about tyres and
wheels can be obtained from any
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ommends that you only use tyres which
You will find a table of tyre pressures on the
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap . You
specifically for your vehicle. These tyres are
will find further information about tyre pres-
specially adapted for use with the control
sures in the "Operation" section
systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are (Y page 157).
marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Exten-

ded* (with run-flat characteristics)
If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can-
not accept any responsibility for damage
which may occur. Information about tyres
can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

! If you fit tyres other than those tested and

recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac-
teristics such as handling, noise levels and
fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, dimensional variations and different
tyre deformation characteristics could
cause the tyres to make contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could
result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle.

* optional
246
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 247
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

Tyres

Tyres of the same dimensions

SLK 200 SLK 280

KOMPRESSOR

Both axles Summer tyres 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91W

Winter tyres 205/55 R16 91H M+S 205/55 R16 91H M+S

Light-alloy wheels 7J x 16 H2 ET 34 7J x 16 H2 ET 34

Both axles Winter tyres 225/45 R17 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S

Winter tyres33,34 225/45 R17 91H M+S MOExtended 225/45 R17 91H M+S MOExtended

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 36

Both axles Winter tyres34 225/40 R18 92H XL M+S 225/40 R18 92H XL M+S

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 36

33 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
34 Winter tyres for retrofitting. Only certain makes of tyre are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information.

* optional
247
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 248
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Both axles Winter tyres – 205/50 R17 89H M+S

Light-alloy wheels – 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 37

Both axles Winter tyres 225/45 R17 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S

Winter tyres35,36 225/45 R17 91H M+S MOExtended –

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 37

Both axles Winter tyres36 225/40 R18 92H XL M+S 225/40 R18 92H XL M+S

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 37

Mixed tyres

SLK 200 SLK 280

KOMPRESSOR

Front axle Summer tyres 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91W

Light-alloy wheels 7J x 16 H2 ET 34 7J x 16 H2 ET 34

35 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
36 Winter tyres for retrofitting. Only certain makes of tyre are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information.

* optional
248
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 249
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

SLK 200 SLK 280
KOMPRESSOR

Rear axle 37 Summer tyres 225/50 R16 92V 225/50 R16 92W

Light-alloy wheels 8J x 16 H2 ET 30 8J x 16 H2 ET 30

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 55 AMG

SLK 280
SLK 350

Front axle Summer tyres 225/45 R17 91W –

Summer tyres38 225/45 R17 91W MOExtended –

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 17 H2 ET 36 –

Rear axle 39 Summer tyres 245/40 R17 91W –

Summer tyres38 245/40 R17 91W MOExtended –

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 30 –

Front axle Summer tyres 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 37

37 Use of snow chains not permitted.

38 Tyreswith run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated.
39 Use of snow chains not permitted.

* optional
249
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 250
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 55 AMG
SLK 280
SLK 350

Rear axle39 Summer tyres 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 30 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 30

AMG equipment*

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR / SLK 280 / SLK 350

Front axle Summer tyres 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 37

Rear axle 40 Summer tyres 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 30

39 Use of snow chains not permitted.

40 Use of snow chains not permitted.

* optional
250
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 251
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

Performance Package

SLK 55 AMG

Front axle Summer tyres 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 37

Rear axle 40 Summer tyres 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL

Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 30

Both axles Winter tyres 225/40 R18 92H XL M+S

Light-alloy wheels 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 37

40 Use of snow chains not permitted.

251
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 252
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Tyres and wheels

Spare wheel*
Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a collapsible emergency spare
wheel*.
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit by the factory.
All models, except SLK 55 AMG Performance Package

Collapsible emergency Tyres 145 / 70 - 17 92P

spare wheel*41
Tyre pressure 3.5 bar

Wheels 4.5B x 17 H2 ET 12

41 Use of snow chains not permitted.

* optional
252
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 253
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Vehicle weights
Vehicle dimensions

SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Vehicle length 4,103 mm 4,103 mm 4,103 mm 4,099 mm

(ECE)

Vehicle width 2,012 mm 2,012 mm 2,012 mm 1,969 mm

including exte-
rior mirrors

Vehicle height 1,296 mm 1,296 mm 1,298 mm 1,287 mm

Wheelbase 2,430 mm 2,430 mm 2,430 mm 2,430 mm

Vehicle weights

The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload.
SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Unladen weight (in accordance 1,390 kg 1,455 kg 1,485 kg 1,575 kg

with EC directive)

Maximum permissible gross vehi- 1,705 kg 1,770 kg 1,800 kg 1,850 kg

cle weight

253
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 254
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Vehicle weights
SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Maximum permissible front axle 840 kg 900 kg 910 kg 910 kg

load

Maximum permissible rear axle 935 kg 940 kg 940 kg 940 kg

load

Maximum roof load 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg

Maximum luggage compartment 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg

load

254
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 255
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Service products and capacities Other designations or recommendations that Fuels
relate to a level of quality or a specification in
Notes on service products and capaci- accordance with an MB Approval have not G Risk of explosion
ties necessarily been approved by Mercedes- Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
Service products are: Benz. and smoking are therefore prohibited when
Rfuels You can obtain further information from any handling fuels.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Before refuelling, always turn off the
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
G Risk of injury engine.
Rcoolant
When handling, storing and disposing of G Risk of injury
Rbrake fluid any service products, please observe the
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
Rwindscreen washer fluid relevant regulations, as you could other-
skin or clothing.
wise endanger yourself and others.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only Allowing fuels to come into direct contact
use those products which have been tested Keep service products away from children.
with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is
and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for To protect your health, do not allow service damaging to your health.
your vehicle and are listed in the Mercedes- products to come into contact with your
Benz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter eyes or open wounds. See a doctor imme-
since: diately if any service product is swallowed. Tank capacity
Rparts and service products are matched
H Environmental note Total capacity 70 l
Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved
Dispose of service products in an environ-
service products is not covered by the war- mentally-responsible manner. Of which reserve Approximately 9 l
ranty fuel
You can recognise service products approved SLK 55 AMG Approximately 10 l
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tion on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) petrol engine. Never mix petrol with diesel.
Even small amounts of diesel result in dam- Z

255
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 256
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

age to the injection system. Damage result- Rat very low temperatures related to fuel consumption and therefore
ing from adding diesel is not covered by the Rin urban traffic depend on:
warranty. Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
Ron short trips
More information about refuelling and fuels Rdriving style
Rin mountainous terrain
can be found in the "Operation" section.
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
! Do not use any special additives, as they ronmental influences or road conditions
Introduction to fuel consumption can cause malfunctions and engine dam-
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
age. Damage resulting from the use of such
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in additives is not covered by the Mercedes- sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
the following situations: Benz warranty. iced regularly.

H Environmental note
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci-
entists believe to be principally responsible
for global warming (the greenhouse effect).
Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly

256
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 257
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Fuel consumption
The information does not refer to a specific vehicle, but serves as a means of comparing the different vehicle types.

Manual transmis- SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR42 SLK 28042 SLK 35042 SLK 55 AMG
sion

Urban —

Extra-urban —

Overall (NEDC) —

CO2 emissions —

Automatic trans- SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR42 SLK 28042 SLK 35042 SLK 55 AMG
mission*

Urban 17.7 l/100 km

Extra–urban 8.8 l/100 km

Overall (NEDC) 12.0 l/100 km

CO2 emissions 288 g/km

42 Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

* optional
257
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 258
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Engine oil
A list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Approval by Mercedes-Benz is also often indicated by the MB Sheet number on the oil container. The table
shows which MB Sheet number applies to which engine:
SLK 200 KOMPRESSO SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG
R

MB Sheet number 229.3/229.31/229.5/ 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.543

229.51

i In the event that the: is not available, you can use another min- ! Do not use lubricant additives, since they
Rengine oil brand eral or synthetic engine oil which has been lead to increased wear and damage to the
approved by Mercedes-Benz. mechanical assemblies. The use of lubri-
Rgrade (MB Sheet number)
Mixing oils reduces the benefits of high- cant additives will result in a restriction of
RSAE classification (viscosity) your warranty.
grade engine oil.

Capacities
The following values indicate the various total engine capacities.
Engine with oil filter SLK 200 KOMPRESSO SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG
R

Replacement amount 5.5 l 8.0 l 8.0 l 8.0 l

43 Restriction: only SAE XW-40 engine oils may be used.

258
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 259
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Coolant If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
the correct concentration, the boiling point of
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- the coolant will be around 130 °C.
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
following tasks:
tion in the cooling system should:
Ranti-corrosion protection
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling
Rantifreeze protection system against freezing down to around –
Rraising the boiling point 37 °C.
Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is protection down to –45 °C), otherwise heat
topped up with a coolant that will ensure will not be effectively dissipated.
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tion. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
! Only top up with coolant that has been rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
premixed with the desired quantity of anti- mends using an antifreeze/corrosion inhibi-
freeze protection. You could otherwise tor which has been approved for Mercedes-
damage the engine. Benz.
There is more information about coolant ! The cooling system contains a lifetime
and topping it up on Mercedes-Benz Spec- supply which must be renewed after 15
ifications for Service Products Sheet years, or after 250, 000 km at the latest.
310.1. Have the renewal confirmed in the Service
Booklet.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
The warranty is only valid if you top up with
even in countries where high temperatures
an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which
prevail.
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be
sufficiently protected from corrosion, and
the boiling point will be too low.

259
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 260
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Capacities
The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities.
SLK 200 KOMPRESSOR SLK 280 SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

Coolant 8.2 l 9.8 l 9.8 l 11.1 l

Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection

Down to –37 °C 4.1 l 4.9 l 4.9 l 5.55 l

(approximately 50%)

Down to –45 °C 4.5 l 5.4 l 5.4 l 6.1 l

(approximately 55%)

Brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this Windscreen washer system
confirmed in the Service Booklet.
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs The washer fluid reservoir holds approxi-
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling mately 7 litres.
point. i There is usually a notice in the engine
compartment to remind you when the next The headlamp cleaning system* and the
G Risk of accident brake fluid change is due. windscreen washer system are both supplied
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too from the washer fluid reservoir.
low, vapour pockets may form in the brake X At temperatures above freezing point:
system when the brakes are applied hard Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a
(e.g. when driving downhill). This would mixture of water and windscreen washer
impair braking efficiency. concentrate (Y page 154).
Have the brake fluid renewed every two X At temperatures below freezing point:
years with a brake fluid that has been Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a
mixture of water, antifreeze and wind-
screen washer concentrate (Y page 154).

* optional
260
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 261
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Service products and capacities

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem-
peratures.
G Risk of fire
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking
are prohibited when windscreen washer
concentrate is being handled.

261
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 262
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Frequencies for garage door openers*

Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz

Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868

Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868

Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433

Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868

Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

* optional
262
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 263
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz

United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 418, 433, 868

Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 27, 40, 433, 868

DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348
DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350
DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357
DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358
DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359

Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 27, 40, 433

000440/2005, 000441/2005
000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005, 3 June 2005

Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868

Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868

Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868

Z

* optional
263
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 264
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz

Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868

Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433

The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868

Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Russia 13 May 05 433

* optional
264
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 265
vpfaff7,

Technical data

Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz

Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433

Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 40, 433, 868

Slovak
206/11/2005 4 May 05

Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 27, 40, 433, 868

000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005

South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433

Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06

Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 27, 40, 433

Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433

Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868

* optional
265
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 266
vpfaff7,

266
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 267
vpfaff7,

267
171_AKB; 3; 4, en-GB 2007-11-13T10:50:25+01:00 - Seite 268
vpfaff7,

268